JP2018027479A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To execute a performance corresponding to an operation of operation means using a new method.SOLUTION: In a game machine including gaming control means for integrally controlling a game, performance control means for controlling a performance related to the game, and operation means which is operable by a player, the operation means includes first operation means and second operation means, and a performance includes a first performance, a second performance, and a third performance. The performance control means can execute a player-waiting state under the condition that the game is not executed. The performance control means executes the first performance on the basis of an operation to the first operation means during the player-waiting state, executes the second performance on the basis of an operation to the second operation means during the player-waiting state, and executes the third performance on the basis of an operation to the second operation means during execution of the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 117

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine gaming machine provided with operation means that can be operated by a player.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, based on the fact that the game ball launched from the launching device by operating the launching operation unit wins the starting winning opening in the process of flowing down the game area formed on the game board. When a predetermined auxiliary game (for example, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed on a display device) is executed and the result of the auxiliary game is a special result set in advance, a special game state (for example, advantageous for the player) (for example, What is configured to generate a jackpot gaming state in which an opening / closing member of a variable prize apparatus provided in a gaming area is converted into an open state in a predetermined manner is known.

  In recent years, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a push button is provided on the front surface of a gaming machine and a gaming operation change is given when an operation on the push button is detected (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-129984 A

  Nowadays, most gaming machines are equipped with push buttons and provide effects according to the operation of the push buttons. Therefore, the production corresponding to the push button operation is a general production method, and freshness and novelty are reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of the game by performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means by a novel method.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game comprising game control means for comprehensively controlling a game, effect control means for controlling effects related to the game, and operation means operable by the player In the machine, the operation means includes a first operation means and a second operation means, and the effects include a first effect, a second effect, and a third effect, and the effect control means includes The customer waiting state can be executed on condition that the game is not executed, the first effect is executed based on an operation on the first operation means in the customer waiting state, and the customer waiting state is executed. The second effect is executed based on an operation on the second operation means, and the third effect is executed based on an operation on the second operation means that is executing a game.

  The “game control means” is, for example, a game control device. “Production control means” is, for example, a production control device. The “operation means” is, for example, an effect button or an operation unit. The “first effect” is, for example, an effect relating to sound output in a state where the variable display game is not executed, and the “second effect” is, for example, a change in the effect mode, a button effect while waiting for a customer, etc. The “third effect” is, for example, an effect in which a player's operation intervenes in a variable display game.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means by a novel method.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board with which the gaming machine of the 1st embodiment of the present invention is equipped. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the game control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the production | presentation control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the operation control apparatus of the game machine 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection form of the launch control apparatus, launch motor, game control apparatus, payout control apparatus, power supply apparatus, etc. of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the discharge control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a circuit diagram showing a configuration of a driver according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a circuit diagram of a driver circuit according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the touch switch signal transmission process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bit transposition pattern of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the checksum calculation process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial value random number update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the touch sensor monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the touch sensor monitoring process to which the monitoring process of the firing stop switch signal was added. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the command setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration return process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the input process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switch reading process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the output process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout command transmission process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main prize ball remaining number update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning opening switch / error monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fraud & winning prize monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning number counter update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the error check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol fluctuation | variation control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2 byte distribution process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation process transfer setting process (special figure 1) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 of the fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation mode information check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the fanfare / interval process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the fanfare / interval process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the solenoid information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 1 during the special winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process 3 during the special winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening remaining ball process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 2 during the fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the radio wave fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the external information edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main prize ball signal edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port signal edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process (1st main process) performed by the microcomputer for main control (1stCPU) of the production | presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st scene control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the command reception interruption process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process (2nd main process) performed by the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) of the production | presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal game process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the V blank interruption process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the timing which the game control apparatus which received the touch switch signal of the 1st Embodiment of this invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. It is a time chart which shows an example of the timing which the game control apparatus which continuously received the touch switch signal of the 1st Embodiment of this invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. It is a time chart which shows that the game control apparatus which received the low level touch switch signal immediately after receiving the high level touch switch signal of the 1st Embodiment of this invention does not output a touch-on command. It is a time chart which shows an example of the timing which a game control apparatus outputs a touch-on / touch-off command when the touch effect flag of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is ON / OFF. It is a time chart which shows an example of the operation timing when the touch operation of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is successful. It is a time chart which shows an example of the operation timing when the touch operation of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention fails. It is a time chart which shows an example of the operation timing when a touch operation is successful by operation of the firing stop switch of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the operation timing in case a touch operation is successful by the firing stop switch operation and touch operation of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation screen of the specific production (touch production) of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition diagram which shows an example of the notice effect after performing the specific effect (touch effect) of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the timing at which operation of an operation part and notice effect are started in the big hit fluctuation of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which shows the timing which the discharge instruction | indication effect performed when the operation part is not operated before opening of a winning opening of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention is started. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the specific effect setting process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the specific production | presentation setting process to which the determination process of the presence or absence of firing stop switch command was added. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the execution content of the 1st specific production of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the execution content of the 2nd specific production of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal time fluctuation pattern selection group information table setting process of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is the flowchart to which the determination process of the presence or absence of the firing stop switch command was added. It is a figure showing the variation time of the 1st-4th variation pattern selection group information of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st-4th fluctuation pattern selection group information selected according to the presence or absence of the touch sensor of the 5th Embodiment of this invention, and the number of pending | holdings. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal time fluctuation pattern selection group information table setting process of the modification of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st-4th fluctuation pattern selection group information selected according to the presence or absence of the touch sensor of the modification of the 5th Embodiment of this invention, and the number of pending | holding. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration process of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is the time chart 1 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is the time chart 2 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is the time chart 3 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is the time chart 4 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the conventional control result (processing result). It is the time chart 5 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration process (when performing special production) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the special effect of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is the time chart 6 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the special effect of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is another figure which shows the example of an effect of the special effect of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is the time chart 7 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process (special figure normal process 2) of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration return process (customer waiting demonstration return process 2) of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is the time chart 8 which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the control result (processing result) of the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation button input process of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the button effect of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the other example of effect of the button effect of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the special effect of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the touch switch signal transmission process of the modification of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the touch sensor monitoring process of the modification of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the timing which the game control apparatus which received the touch switch signal of the modification of the 8th Embodiment of this invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. It is a time chart which shows an example of the timing which the game control apparatus which received the touch switch signal of the modification of the 8th Embodiment of this invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. It is a time chart which shows that the payout control apparatus which received the low level touch switch signal immediately after receiving the high level touch switch signal of the modification of the 8th Embodiment of this invention does not output the said signal. It is a time chart which shows an example of the timing which a payout control apparatus outputs a touch switch signal, when the touch effect flag of the modification of the 8th Embodiment of this invention is ON / OFF. It is a time chart which shows recognition of the operation state of the operation part in the effect control apparatus of the modification of the 8th Embodiment of this invention, and an effect button. It is a figure showing a slot machine gaming machine.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(First embodiment)
[Composition of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an opening / closing frame 4 that is attached to a main body frame 2 fixed to an island facility via a hinge 3 so that a right side portion can be freely opened and closed. The open / close frame 4 includes a front frame 5 and a glass frame (game frame) 6.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 5, and a glass frame 6 having a cover glass 6 a that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 can be opened individually. For example, only the glass frame 6 can be opened to access the game area 31 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 30. Further, by opening the front frame 5 in a state where the glass frame 6 is not opened, it is possible to access a game control device 600 (see FIG. 3) or the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30.

  A decorative member 7 is disposed around the cover glass 6 a of the glass frame 6. A frame decoration device 21 (see FIG. 4) configured by LEDs (light emitting diodes: light sources) or the like is accommodated in the decoration member 7, and the light emission state of the decoration member 7 is controlled by controlling the frame decoration device 21. Can be adjusted.

  An illumination unit 8 is disposed above the glass frame 6, and a movable illumination 9 is disposed on the left and right sides of the illumination unit 8. The illumination unit 8 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and performs a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The movable illumination 9 includes an illumination member such as an LED, and a frame effect device 22 (see FIG. 4) that includes an illumination drive motor that drives the illumination member. The frame effect device 22 of the movable illumination 9 is controlled so as to drive, for example, rotationally drive the illumination member according to the gaming state. In addition, the illumination member arrange | positioned inside the illumination unit 8 and the movable illumination 9 also comprises some frame decoration apparatuses 21 (refer FIG. 4).

  The gaming machine 1 includes an upper speaker 10a and a lower speaker 10b that emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like. The upper speaker 10 a is disposed on both upper side portions of the glass frame 6, and the lower speaker 10 b is disposed below the upper plate 11 a constituting the upper plate unit 11.

  A gaming state notification LED 12 for notifying abnormality in the gaming machine 1 is provided on the upper right side of the movable illumination 9 disposed on the left side. When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 1, the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on or blinks, and a notification sound for notifying the abnormality is output from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

  Abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine 1 include failure of the gaming machine 1 and implementation of fraud. The illegal act includes, for example, an act of illegally manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet or an act of vibrating the gaming machine 1. These fraudulent acts are detected by detecting magnetism with the magnetic sensor switch 23 (see FIG. 3) or detecting vibration with the vibration sensor switch.

  Further, the act of opening the open / close frame 4 illegally is also included in the illegal act. The open / closed state of the front frame 5 is detected by a front frame open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3), and the open / closed state of the glass frame 6 is detected by a glass frame open detection switch 26 (see FIG. 3).

  An upper plate unit 11 including an upper plate 11 a is provided at the lower part of the glass frame 6. The game balls stored in the upper plate 11a are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) provided at the lower part of the front frame 5.

  A fixed plate 13 fixed to the front frame 5 at a position below the glass frame 6 includes a lower plate 14 and an operation unit 15 (a firing operation unit, a firing handle) for driving a ball launching device (launching device). Provided. When the player rotates the operation unit 15, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 11 a to the game area 31 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 30. The lower plate 14 is provided with a ball removal mechanism 16 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 14 to the outside.

  A launch stop switch 110 (see FIG. 6) and a touch switch 120 (see FIG. 6) are provided at or near the operation unit 15 for operating the ball launching device. The launch stop switch 110 (launch control operation unit) outputs a launch stop switch signal when pressed by the player, and stops launching the game ball of the ball launcher. The touch switch 120 (touch sensor) detects that the player is operating the operation unit 15 (the player's hand is touching the operation unit 15). The launch of the game ball from the device is stopped. The touch switch 120 (touch sensor) constitutes an operation detection unit that can detect an operation on the operation unit 15. For example, the touch switch 120 has an annular metal part, and detects a change in capacitance caused by a player touching the metal part, and outputs a signal. Instead, the touch switch 120 may detect temperature or the like as a human sensor.

  In response to the operation of the operation unit 15 by the player, the ball launching device plays a game with a first launch mode in which a game ball is launched with a first launch rate and a second launch rate different from the first launch rate. It is possible to launch in the second launch mode in which a sphere is launched. For example, the first firing mode is one of left-handed and right-handed, and the second firing mode is the other of left-handed and right-handed. Left-handed and right-handed are modes in which game balls flow down on the left and right sides of the game area 31 (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  The upper plate unit 11 is provided with an effect button 17 for receiving an operation input from a player on the front side of the upper plate 11a. A selection button 29 is arranged next to the effect button 17. When the player operates the effect button 17, the player performs an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game on the variable display device (display device, decoration display device, variable display means) 35 (see FIG. 2). It is also possible to change the effect pattern (effect mode) in the normal gaming state. The fluctuation display game includes a special figure fluctuation display game and a general figure fluctuation display game (a general figure game, a specific fluctuation display game). Shall be pointed to.

  The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which a specific gaming state has not occurred. The specific game state is, for example, a probability variation game state (high probability state, probability variation state) with a high probability that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit, and a unit of the special figure variation display game when the variation time reduction function is activated. A short-time gaming state (short-time state), a big-hitting gaming state (special gaming state), etc. that can improve the number of executions per hour. Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a low probability state corresponding to the high probability state. In addition, in the probability changing gaming state other than the latent probability changing state and the short-time gaming state, the below-described ordinary power support is executed.

  Below the decorative member 7 of the glass frame 6, a ball lending button 18 that is operated when a player rents a game ball, and a discharge button 19 that is operated to discharge a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown). Are arranged. Further, a balance display unit 20 for displaying a balance of a prepaid card or the like is provided between the ball lending button 18 and the discharge button 19.

[Game board configuration]
FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 with the center case (front component) 34 attached.

  The game board 30 is provided with a metal guide rail 32a and a conductive resin partition member 32b on the surface of a rectangular game board 32 made of plastic or the like to partition and form a substantially circular game region 31. ing. The game board 32 is, for example, a transparent member that can be seen through the back. A game board main body is configured by the game board 32, the guide rail 32 a that partitions the game area 31, and the partition member 32 b.

  In the game area 31, a center case (front component) 34 having an opening (display window) 34a is disposed. An opening having a shape along the outer periphery of the center case 34 is formed in the game board 32, and the center case 34 is fitted into the opening from the front.

  On the back side of the game board 30 is provided an effect device unit (back surface component) (not shown) composed of various effect devices, and on the back side of the effect device unit, there is a variable display device 35 as a variable display device. And an effect control device 700 (FIG. 4) for controlling the effects and the like displayed on the fluctuation display device 35.

  The variation display device 35 (decoration display device) includes a display unit 35a capable of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game (decoration display game) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information. The opening 34a of the center case 34 is provided corresponding to the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35, and the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is visually recognized through the opening (display window) 34a of the center case 34. It is possible.

  The display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is a liquid crystal display capable of displaying an arbitrary image, and is based on the progress of the game, such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game on the display screen. An image can be displayed. The variable display device 35 sets a plurality of variable display areas (for example, three variable display areas on the left, center, and right or three variable display areas on the upper, center, and lower sides) on the display unit 35a, In the variable display game, an independent image can be displayed in each display area. Note that the variable display device 35 is not limited to a device including a liquid crystal display, and may include a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The game area 31 on the right side of the center case 34 is provided with a normal figure start gate 36 that establishes a normal symbol (normal figure) variable display game start condition when a game ball passes. In the game board 30 of FIG. 2, the game ball can pass through the normal symbol start gate 36 when the player hits the game ball on the right side of the game area 31 to the right. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 31 passes through the usual figure start gate 36, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  In the game area 31 on the lower left side of the center case 34, three general winning holes 40 are arranged, and in the game area 31 on the lower right side of the center case 34, one general prize opening 40 is arranged.

  The game area 31 below the center case 34 is provided with a first start winning opening (first start winning area) 37 for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game. A second start winning opening (second start winning area) 38 is provided in the game area 31 on the lower right side of the center case 34 and below the usual start gate 36. The second start winning opening 38 is provided with a pair of movable members 38a whose upper side is opened in an inverted “C” shape and converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38, a special symbol (special drawing) variable display game is executed. In the gaming board 30 of FIG. 2, the game ball can easily win the first start winning opening 37 when left-handed, and the game ball can win the second start winning opening 38 when right-handed.

  The pair of movable members 38a of the second start winning prize port 38 normally maintains a closed state (a winning regulation state that is disadvantageous for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. When the movable member 38a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second start winning opening 38.

  The movable member 38a opens in the shape of a reverse “C” via the general electric solenoid 27 (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure change display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, and the game ball is The state is changed (converted) to an open state (easy winning state advantageous to the player) that easily flows into the second start winning opening 38.

  It is a starting condition for starting the special figure changing display game that a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38, and the first start winning opening 37 and the second start winning opening are provided. Reference numeral 38 denotes a variable start winning device for generating the start condition. In addition, the first start winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 can be adjusted by the obstacle nail.

  The movable member 38a is controlled by a game control device 600 described later. The game control device 600 increases the occurrence frequency of the easy winning state (open state) or lengthens the generation time of the easy winning state (open state) in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state compared to the normal gaming state. Public power support is implemented. The state in which the ordinary power support is executed is called the ordinary power support state. That is, in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state that are in the normal power support state, the player can easily enter the second start winning area by making a right turn.

  In the game area 31 below the first start winning opening 37, an attacker type that opens the first big winning opening by rotating the upper end side to the front side by a large winning opening solenoid 28a (see FIG. 3). A first special variable winning device 41 having an opening / closing door 41a is provided. The first special variable winning device 41 converts the state of the first big prize opening from a closed state (blocking state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure display game. In addition, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the first big prize opening. Note that a plurality of lower count switches 605a to 605m (see FIG. 3) are arranged in the first grand prize opening as detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the special prize opening. In the present embodiment, the description will be made assuming that the number of lower count switches is two.

  In addition, a second special variable prize winning device 42 having a turning portion 42a that opens by rotating the big prize winning solenoid 28b (see FIG. 3) by the big winning prize solenoid 28b (see FIG. 3) is provided at the upper right portion of the center case 34. It has been. Similar to the first special variable winning device 41, the second special variable winning device 42 is in an open state (from a closed state unfavorable to the player) from a state in which the second big winning opening is closed according to the result of the special figure display game. (Special gaming state advantageous to the player), and by allowing the game ball to easily flow into the second big prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. . Note that an upper count switch 606 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second grand prize opening as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

  A game ball is placed in the general winning port 40, the first starting winning port 37, the second starting winning port 38, the first big winning port of the first special variable winning device 41, and the second big winning port of the second special variable winning device 42. When a prize is won, the payout control device 640 discharges the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning prize opening from the payout unit 642 to the upper plate 11a. In general, the number of winning balls (for example, 15) when winning the grand prize opening is the largest, followed by the general winning opening 40 (for example, 10) and the start winning opening (for example, 3), but the first big The number of winning balls at the winning opening and the second major winning opening or the number of winning balls at the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be different.

  The game area 31 below the second start winning opening 38 is provided with an out opening 43 for collecting game balls that have not won the winning opening or the like.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 31 and in the lower right part of the game board 32, a collective display for executing a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a general figure fluctuation display game. A device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display unit) 51 and a second special figure fluctuation display unit (figure display unit) (figure display game) composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Special figure 2 display) 52, a general figure fluctuation display section (general figure display) 53 for a common figure fluctuation display game, and a memory display section for notifying the start (hold) memory number of each fluctuation display game (special figure) 1 hold display part 54, special figure 2 hold display part 55, universal figure hold display part 56).

  Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when the big hit occurs, and the first game state display unit (first game state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and when the short time state occurs. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58 for notifying the occurrence of a short-time state, and a third game for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. A state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 59, a round display unit 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the first special variation winning device 41 and the second special variation winning device 42) Is provided.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, the details of the general map variation display game and the special diagram variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 1, a game is played by launching a game ball from the ball launch unit 140 toward the game area 31. The launched game balls flow down the game area 31 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 31, and the normal start gate 36, the general winning opening 40, the first start The winning opening 37, the second start winning opening 38, the first special variation winning apparatus 41 or the second special variable winning apparatus 42 is won, or the game area 31 flows into the out opening 43 provided at the bottom of the gaming area 31. Discharged from. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning port 40, the first starting winning port 37, the second starting winning port 38, the first special variable winning device 41 or the second special variable winning device 42, the type of the winning port that is won is determined. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 11a via the payout unit 642.

  The normal start gate 36 is provided with a gate switch 603 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 36. When the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 36, it is detected by the gate switch 603, and the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not been completed, When the 2 start winning opening 38 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 36, the stored number is added (+1) if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number.

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 36 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the electric solenoid 27 (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 38a is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the second start winning prize port 38 is converted. Is acceptable.

  The winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 37 and the winning to the second start winning opening 38 are detected by the first start opening switch 601 (see FIG. 3) and the second start opening switch 602 (see FIG. 3). The A game ball won in the first start winning opening 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number is stored, and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 38 is It is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

  When detecting the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers become game information related to the execution of the variable display game, and are respectively specified as special figure start winning memories (start memories) in a special figure hold memory area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 600 (start memory holding means). The number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times) is stored as a limit. The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display unit 54 and the special figure 2 hold display unit 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display unit 35a of the variable display unit 35. Can also be displayed.

  The game control device 600 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the first start winning opening 37 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 600 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the second starting prize opening 38 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are played by stopping and displaying a predetermined result form after the identification information is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. Further, in the variation display device 35, there is a decoration special map variation display game (decoration display game) that displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special diagram variation display game. Executed. The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display device.

  The decorative special symbol variable display game in the variable display device 35 or the like is such that the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers is left or above (first special symbol), right or below (second special symbol), It is performed by starting the variable display (scroll display) in the order of the middle (third special symbol), sequentially stopping the symbols changing after a predetermined time, and displaying the result of the special symbol variable display game. In addition, in the variable display device 35 and the like, various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed in order to improve interest.

  When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of this, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the variable display device 35 or the like is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  After that, when a special gaming state occurs, energization to the big prize opening solenoid 28a and the big prize opening solenoid 28b (see FIG. 3) provided in the first special variation prize winning device 41 and the second special variable prize winning device 42 causes a large amount. The winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the big winning opening provided in the first special variable winning device 41 and the second special variable winning device 42 is opened widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege that it can be acquired is given.

  In the present embodiment, a round number determination game (auxiliary game), which will be described later, may be executed after the special result mode is derived and before the special game state occurs. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  As for the decorative special figure variable display game in the variable display device 35 or the like, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas. It may be executed in the display device or display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in the order in which the start memory is stored.

  Also, the first start winning opening 37 (second start winning opening 38) in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the start memory number is zero. When the game ball wins, the start memory (special chart start memory) is stored in the RAM of the game control device 600 (see FIG. 3) as the start right is generated. At this time, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is immediately started based on the start memory. At this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. The

  On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation is performed. If the game ball wins the first start winning opening 37 (second start winning opening 38) when the display game is not finished or in the special gaming state, the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. The start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the player performs left-handed or right-handed according to the gaming state. A left-handed or right-handed instruction is displayed on the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 so that the player can easily make a game according to the game state.

[Game control device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the game control device 600 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 3 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the game control device 600 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  A game control device 600 shown in FIG. 3 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls games in the gaming machine 1. The game control device 600 constitutes a game control means. A power supply device 800, a payout control device 640, and an effect control device 700 are connected to the game control device 600. The game control device 600 transmits a control signal (command information or command) to the payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700 to instruct execution of various processes. Furthermore, the game control device 600 is connected to various switches, solenoids to be controlled, and the like.

  The game control device 600 includes a CPU unit 610 that performs various arithmetic processes, an input unit 620 that receives input of various signals, and an output unit 630 that outputs various signals and control signals. The CPU unit 610, the input unit 620, and the output unit 630 are connected to each other by a data bus 680.

  The input unit 620 receives signals output from various switches provided on the game board 30 and the like and signals output from the payout control device 640. The input unit 620 includes a proximity interface (I / F) 621 (621a, 621b) and input ports 622 (622a, 622b), 623.

  The input ports 622 and 623 receive a signal input via the proximity I / F 621 or directly receive a signal input from the outside. Information input to the input ports 622 and 623 is provided to the CPU unit 610 and the like via the data bus 680.

  The proximity I / F 621 is an interface that receives signals output from various switches, converts the input signals, and outputs the converted signals to the input port 622. A first start port switch 601, a second start port switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning port switches 604a to 604n, and lower count switches 605a to 605m are connected to the proximity I / F 621a. An upper count switch 606 is connected to the proximity I / F 621b.

  The first start port switch 601 is a switch that detects that a game ball has won the first start winning port 37. The second start port switch 602 is a switch that detects that a game ball has won the second start winning port 38. The gate switch 603 is a switch that detects that the game ball has passed the usual start gate 36. The winning award opening switches 604a to 604n are switches for detecting that the game ball has won the general winning opening 40.

  The lower count switches 605a to 605m and the upper count switch 606 are switches that detect that a game ball has won a big winning opening. When a winning game ball is detected by the lower count switches 605a to 605m and the upper count switch 606, the number of winning game balls is counted, and the counted number of gaming balls is stored in a memory provided in the game control device 600. Remembered.

  The proximity I / F 621 receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from various switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the proximity I / F 621 is normally within a predetermined range (7V-11V), the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as a floating state and output an abnormality detection signal.

  In addition, since the output value (ON / OFF) of the signal input to the proximity I / F 621 is switched by attaching / detaching the connector of the switch connected to the proximity I / F 621, the proximity I / F 621 is not connected to the switch. Even so, the output is kept constant.

  The reason for providing two proximity I / Fs, the proximity I / F 621a and the proximity I / F 621b, is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 621a is limited. The proximity I / F 621b may be smaller than the proximity I / F 621a depending on the number of input terminals that are insufficient, so that the cost may be reduced. Note that the proximity I / F 621b may not be provided by using the proximity I / F 621a having a necessary number of input terminals.

  Of the output of the proximity I / F 621, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 24 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the input port 622a. Further, the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 23 provided on the front frame 5 of the gaming machine 1 or the like is also input to the input port 622a.

  The magnetic sensor 23 detects a magnetic force in order to detect an illegal act of manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet. The radio wave sensor 24 detects a radio wave irradiated toward the gaming machine 1 in order to detect an illegal act that causes the prize opening switch 604 or the like to malfunction. Note that a vibration sensor that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the input port 622a.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621, the output to the input port 622b is supplied from the game control device 600 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 650. Further, the detection signals of the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621 are input to the gaming microcomputer 611 via the inverting circuit 612 in addition to the input port 622b. It is configured. The inversion circuit 612 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 611 assumes that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when using a micro switch as the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602, it is possible to directly input the detection signal to the gaming microcomputer 611 without providing the inverting circuit 612. . That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 to the gaming microcomputer 611, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 621 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 621 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 800. It has become.

  A signal from the magnetic sensor 23 is directly input to the input port 622a, and signals from the front frame opening detection switch (SW) 25 and the glass frame opening detection switch (SW) 26 are directly input to the input port 623. The input port 623 also receives a status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the payout control device 640.

  The front frame opening detection SW 25 detects that the front frame 5 is opened. The front frame opening detection SW 25 is set to ON when the front frame 5 is released from the main body frame 2, and is set to OFF when the front frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 2.

  The glass frame open detection SW 26 detects that the glass frame 6 has been opened. The glass frame open detection SW 26 is set to ON when the glass frame 6 is released from the front frame 5, and is set to OFF when the glass frame 6 is closed to the front frame 5.

  The data held in the input port 622b can be read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 611 decoding the address assigned to the input port 622b. The same applies to the input port 622a and the input port 623 described later.

  The CPU unit 610 of the game control device 600 includes a game microcomputer 611, an inversion circuit 612, and a crystal oscillator 613.

  The gaming microcomputer 611 includes a CPU 611a, a ROM 611b, and a RAM 611c, and executes various processes such as a big hit lottery by executing a program stored in the ROM 611b based on a signal input via the input unit 620. . The gaming microcomputer 611 is connected via the output unit 630 to a first special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 1 display) 51, a second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52, and a general figure fluctuation display part. (Common figure display) 53, special figure 1 hold display part 54, special figure 2 hold display part 55, universal figure hold display part 56, first game state display part 57, second game state display part 58, third game A collective display device 50 comprising a special display / general map LED board or the like provided with a status display unit 59, a round display unit 60, a general electric solenoid 27, a special prize opening solenoid 28, an effect control device 700, and a payout control device A control signal is transmitted to 640, and the gaming machine 1 is comprehensively controlled. The gaming microcomputer 611 selects a port for inputting or outputting a signal by chip selection.

  The ROM 611b is a non-volatile storage medium and stores programs, data, and the like for game control.

  The RAM 611c is a volatile storage medium, and is used as a work area for temporarily storing information (for example, random number values) necessary for game control.

  The inversion circuit 612 inverts the logical value of the signal (the signal from the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602) input via the proximity I / F 621 and outputs the inverted value to the gaming microcomputer 611.

  The crystal oscillator 613 is configured as an operating clock source of a hard random number for performing a timer interrupt, a system clock signal, a big hit lottery, and the like.

  The output unit 630 of the game control device 600 includes ports 631a to 631e, buffers 632a and 632b, drivers 633a to 633d, and a photocoupler 634.

  The ports 631a to 631e receive signals input via the data bus 680.

  The buffers 632a and 632b temporarily hold signals input via the data bus 680 and the ports 631a and 631b.

  The drivers 633a to 633d generate various drive signals from the signals input via the ports 631c to 631e and output them to each device.

  The photocoupler 634 is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 670, and removes noise from various signals that are input and output to shape the waveforms of the various signals. Information is transmitted and received between the photocoupler 634 and the inspection device 670 by serial communication.

  Information output from the CPU unit 610 by parallel communication is transmitted to the payout control device 640 via the port 631a. Specifically, a 4-bit data signal and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating the validity / invalidity of the data are output. Since there is no need to secure one-way communication for the payout control device 640, a control signal is directly transmitted from the port 631a to the payout control board of the payout control device 640.

  Also, the payout control device 640 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control device 200. The launch control device 200 can launch a game ball into the game area 31 only when a launch permission signal is input.

  The payout control device 640 discharges the winning ball from the payout unit (not shown) based on the prize ball command signal from the game control device 600, or the payout unit based on the lending request signal from the card unit (not shown). Or renting a ball. As described above, the payout control device 640 controls a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, a touch switch signal, and a firing stop switch signal when a failure such as a ball break or failure occurs. Output to device 600.

  The payout abnormality status signal is a signal output when the game ball is not paid out normally. The payout chute ball switch signal is a signal that is output when there is a shortage of game balls before payout. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 14 (see FIG. 1). The touch switch signal is a detection signal of the touch switch 120 provided in the operation unit 15, and is an operation detection signal that is output when the player touches the operation unit 15 for operation and can detect the operation. The touch switch signal is input to the payout control device 640 via the launch control device 200 described later.

  Data is transmitted from the game control device 600 to the effect control device 700 by serial communication. Subcommands are input to the effect control device 700 via the buffer 632a of the output unit 630. By having the buffer 632a, it becomes possible to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 600 from the side of the effect control device 700, and unidirectional communication can be secured. The subcommands transmitted to the effect control device 700 include effects such as a change start command (including a change pattern command), a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command (a command indicating a gaming state), and an error designation command. A control command signal is included.

  A signal output from the CPU unit 610 is input to the special winning opening solenoid 28 and the general power solenoid 27 via the port 631b and the driver 633a. The special prize opening solenoid 28a rotates the opening / closing door 41a (see FIG. 2) of the first special variable prize winning device 41, and the special prize opening solenoid 28b is a rotating part 42a (see FIG. 2) of the second special variable prize winning device 42. And the ordinary solenoid 27 converts the movable member 38a to the open state so that the game ball can be won into the second start winning opening 38.

  The collective display device 50 includes a special figure / common figure LED substrate and a case member for accommodating the special figure / general figure LED substrate. The anode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 633c via a segment line, and the driver 633c and the port 631c are connected. The cathode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 633b via a digit line, and the driver 633b and the port 631b are connected. The on / off drive signal from the driver 633c is input to the anode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50, and the on / off drive signal is output from the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 to the driver 633b.

  The external information terminal 660 is provided with a photo relay, and is a terminal for outputting game data such as a start signal indicating the start of a variable display game and a special prize signal indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to the information collecting terminal device. The game data is output to the external information terminal 660 via the port 631e and the driver 633d.

  The game control device 600 is configured to be connectable to an external test test device via a relay board 650. The test firing test apparatus is an apparatus for performing a type test of the gaming machine 1 in a predetermined engine. The test firing test apparatus includes signals from the first start port switch 601, the second start port switch 602, the gate switch 603, the winning port switches 604a to 604n, the lower count switches 605a to 605m, and the upper count switch 606. Signals necessary for the test fire test, such as signals output to the mouth solenoid 28 and the ordinary electric solenoid 27, are input.

  The game control device 600 is connected to the power supply device 800 via a Schmitt circuit 624 provided in the input unit 620. The Schmitt circuit 624 is a circuit that removes fluctuation (noise) of the input signal in order to prevent the operation of the gaming machine 1 from becoming unstable when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The Schmitt circuit 624 receives a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 800.

  The power supply device 800 includes a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the DC32V voltage. 810, a backup power supply unit 820 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM 611c in the gaming microcomputer 611 at the time of a power failure, a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch, and notifies the game control device 600 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 830 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal.

  The backup power supply unit 820 is a power supply for backing up game data stored in the RAM 611c of the game microcomputer 611. After the power failure is restored, the game control device 600 restores the gaming state before the power failure based on the game data held in the RAM 611c.

  The control signal generator 830 monitors the input voltage (guaranteed DC 32V) of the switching regulator that generates DC 12V and DC 5V. When the detected voltage is DC 17.2 V to DC 20.0 V, it is determined that there is a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal is output from the control signal generation unit 830. The power failure monitoring signal is input to the input port 623 of the input unit 620 via the Schmitt circuit 624. After the power failure monitoring signal is output, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a reset signal. The reset signal is input to each port 631a to 631e of the gaming microcomputer 611 and the output unit 630 via the Schmitt circuit 624. When the game control device 600 receives the power failure monitoring signal, the game control device 600 performs a predetermined power failure process, and stops the operation of the CPU unit 610 after receiving the reset signal.

  The control signal generation unit 830 includes an initialization switch (not shown), and an initialization switch signal is output from the control signal generation unit 830 when the initialization switch is in an ON state when the power is turned on. The initialization switch signal is input to the input port 623 of the input unit 620 via the Schmitt circuit 624. The initialization switch signal is a signal for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 611c of the gaming microcomputer 611 and the RAM of the payout control device 640.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the input port 623, taken into the game microcomputer 611 via the data bus 680, and are handled as signals equivalent to signals from various switches. . This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 611 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt circuit 624 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 611 and supplied to each port of the output unit 630 as described above. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 650 without going through the output unit 630, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 650 for output to the test board. Is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 650. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 622 and 623 of the input unit 620. Data set to each port of the output unit 630 by the gaming microcomputer 611 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 620 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 611 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 611 is reset.

[Production control device]
With reference to FIG. 4, an effect control device 700 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the effect control device 700 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The effect control device 700 shown in FIG. 4 controls the video under the control of the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 710 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 710 in the same manner as the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600. A video display processor (2ndCPU) 720 that performs the above and a VDP (Video Display Processor) that performs image processing for video display on the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 2) according to commands and data from the video control microcomputer 720 730 and a sound source LSI 705 for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

  PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) 702 and 703 storing programs executed by the CPUs are connected to the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720, respectively.

  An image ROM 704 in which character images and video data are stored is connected to the VDP 730.

  The sound source LSI 705 is connected to an audio ROM 706 that stores audio data and the like.

  The main control microcomputer 710 analyzes the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600, instructs the video control microcomputer 720 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 705 about the contents of the reproduced sound. Or The main control microcomputer 710 also executes processing such as LED lighting control, various motor drive control, and production time management based on a control command from the game control device 600.

  RAMs 711 and 721 that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720 are provided in the respective chips. The RAMs 711 and 721 that provide the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Data transmission / reception is performed between the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720 and between the main control microcomputer 710 and the tone generator LSI 705 in a serial manner. In contrast, the main control microcomputer 710 and the VDP 730 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in the parallel system, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial system.

  The VDP 730 includes a VRAM (video RAM) 731 used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 704, a scaler 732 for enlarging and reducing images, and an LVDS. A signal conversion circuit 733 for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the fluctuation display device 35 by the (small amplitude signal transmission) method is provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is output from the VDP 730 to the main control microcomputer 710 in order to synchronize the image of the variation display device 35 and the like and lighting of the LEDs and the like provided on the front frame 5 and the game board 30. Also, the VDP 730 notifies the video control microcomputer 720 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt signals INT0 to n and the video control microcomputer 720 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM 731. A wait signal WAIT is output.

  From the video control microcomputer 720 to the main control microcomputer 710, a synchronization signal SYNC for notifying that the video control microcomputer 720 is operating normally and giving command transmission timing is output.

  Between the main control microcomputer 710 and the tone generator LSI 705, an interrogation signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer 720 uses a CPU capable of performing higher-speed processing than the main control microcomputer 710. By providing a video control microcomputer 720 separately from the main control microcomputer 710 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display on the variable display device 35, etc., a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer 710 alone. And an increase in cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where two CPUs having the same processing capability as the video control microcomputer 720 are used.

  The effect control device 700 includes an interface chip (command I / F) 701 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600. The effect control device 700 receives the change start command, the customer waiting demo command, the fanfare command, the probability information command, the error designation command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 600 as the effect control command signal via the command I / F 701. To do. Since the game microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 710 of the effect control device 700 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 701 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 700 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 741 that controls a panel decoration device 760 including LEDs and the like provided on the center case 34 and the game board 30, and a frame decoration device 21 that includes LEDs and the like provided on the front frame 5 and the like. Frame decoration LED control circuit 742 for controlling the display, board effect motor / SOL for controlling the board effect device 770 including the electric accessory and the decoration member 7 etc. that enhance the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the variable display device 35 Solenoid) control circuit 743, and a frame effect motor control circuit 744 for driving and controlling the frame effect device 22 including an illumination drive motor for the movable illumination 9 and the like are provided. These control circuits (741 to 744) are connected to a main control microcomputer 710 via an address / data bus 740.

  In addition, the effect control device 700 includes signals (operation signals) transmitted from the operation control device 900 and ON / OFF states of effect motors SW (switches) 752a to 752n that detect that various drive motors are driven. A switch (SW) input circuit 750 that detects and transmits a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 710 is provided. In addition, amplifier circuits 707 and 708 including audio power amplifiers for driving the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b are provided.

  The normal power supply unit 810 of the power supply device 800 is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of voltages in order to supply a predetermined level of DC voltage to the effect control device 700 and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 700. ing. Specifically, in addition to DC 32V for driving a drive motor and solenoid, DC 12V for driving a display device such as a variable display device 35 including a liquid crystal panel, and DC 5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 701, It is possible to generate a DC 18V for driving the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b and a voltage of 24V NDC used as a reference for these DC voltages or for lighting a power supply monitor lamp.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 830 of the power supply device 800 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 710, the video control microcomputer 720, the VDP 730, the tone generator LSI 705, and various control circuits (741 to 744, 707, 708). These are reset. The power supply device 800 has a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for the VDP 730 using a general-purpose port included in the video control microcomputer 720. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 720 and the VDP 730 can be improved.

  As described above, the production control device 700 functions as production control means for performing production control based on the command transmitted from the game control device 600, and further, displays for controlling display contents displayed on the variable display device 35. It has a function as a control means and a sound output control means for outputting a sound effect or the like from the speaker 10.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating the operation control device 900 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The operation control device 900 is a control device that comprehensively controls the operation of the effect button 17 (see FIG. 1). The operation control apparatus 900 includes an operation control microcomputer 910, a buffer 901, a crystal oscillator 902, and A / D converters 903 to 905.

  The operation control microcomputer 910 of the operation control device 900 includes a CPU 911, a ROM 912, and a RAM 913, and a program stored in the ROM 912 based on a signal (command) received from the effect control device 700 via the buffer 901. To execute various calculation processes related to the operation of the effect button 17.

  In addition, the operation control microcomputer 910 receives input signals detected for each operation mode (the push button SW 920, the touch panel 930, and the attitude sensor 940) of the effect button 17 through the A / D converters 903 to 905. The CPU 911 executes various arithmetic processes and transmits operation information (operation signal) to the effect control device 700 via the buffer 901.

  The push button SW 920 is provided with a main button SW 921 and a sub button SW 922, the touch panel 930 is provided with a plurality of touch sensors 931 a to 931 n, and the attitude sensor 940 is provided with an acceleration sensor 941 and an angular velocity sensor 942. ing.

  The touch panel 930 may continue to falsely detect a human body by applying static electricity, receiving radio waves, or the like. Therefore, the touch panel 930 has a function of performing a hard reset when a human body is erroneously detected for a certain period of time and returning to a normal state.

  Specifically, the touch panel 930 includes a controller that can perform a watchdog operation (for example, an IC that detects a human body) and a watchdog timer that monitors the detection of regular service pulses.

  The watchdog timer functions as a watchdog that monitors whether the program is operating abnormally. The timer can be cleared from the monitored program, but cannot be stopped. The watchdog timer performs a hard reset when the timer overflows.

  Therefore, when the controller continues to erroneously detect a human body due to the application of static electricity or the like, and when the watchdog timer cannot be cleared, the watchdog timer performs a hard reset of the controller.

  As described above, the touch panel 930 includes the watchdog timer and the controller, so that even if the human body is erroneously detected for a certain period of time due to the application of static electricity or the like, a hard reset of the controller is executed by the watchdog timer. Can return to.

  Note that a watchdog timer is provided for each of the detection points (931a to 931n) of the touch unit in a one-to-one manner, and when the touch sensor falls into a state where the timer cannot be cleared, the touch sensor may be hard reset. Good. In such a configuration, since the controller is not hard reset, an operation input of the effect button 17 during the recovery period is also transmitted to the effect control device 700 even if a part of the detection points falls into an abnormal state.

  When the attitude sensor 940 receives a reset signal RST from the operation control microcomputer 910, the attitude sensor 940 enters a reset state.

  The ROM 912 is a non-volatile storage medium, and stores programs, data, and the like for operation control.

  The RAM 913 is a volatile storage medium and is used as a work area for temporarily storing information (for example, operation signals) necessary for operation control.

  The buffer 901 temporarily holds a signal input / output between the effect control device 700 and the operation control microcomputer 910.

  The crystal oscillator 902 is configured as an operation clock source for counting the operation valid period of the effect button 17 and the like.

(Launch control device)
6 shows the launch control device 200, launch motor 240, game control device 600, payout control device 640, power supply device 800, launch stop switch 110, and touch switch 120 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the connection form of.

  The firing control device 200 is electrically connected to the firing stop switch 110, the touch switch 120, the firing motor 240, and the payout control device 640. The payout control device 640 is electrically connected to the launch control device 200, the game control device 600, and the power supply device 800. Connection lines between these devices may be provided together as a cable. Here, the connection line Vmot is a connection line for distributing power or voltage from the power supply device 800 to the firing motor 240, a motor included in the payout control device 640, and the like. The connection line Vsw is a connection line for distributing power or voltage from the power supply device 800 to various switches (or sensors) such as the touch switch 120. The connection line GND is a ground line.

  The launch control device 200 supplies drive control signals MCS1 to MCS4 as excitation signals to the launch motor 240 in order to control the launch motor 240 constituting the ball launch device. The launch control device 200 constitutes launch control means. The launch motor 240 is an electric motor that rotationally drives a launcher (not shown) that launches a game ball. In the present embodiment, the launch motor 240 is a stepping motor. The operation unit 15, the touch switch 120, the launch motor 240, and the launch stop switch 110 constitute a launch unit 140 (launch operation means) that launches a game ball by the player's operation.

  When the player presses and operates the firing stop switch 110, a launch stop switch signal from the launch stop switch 110 is input to the launch control device 200. When the player touches when operating the operation unit 15, a touch switch signal (operation detection signal) from the touch switch 120 is input to the firing control device 200. Further, the launch stop switch signal and the touch switch signal are branched in the launch control device 200 and input to the game control device 600 via the payout control device 640. The launch control device 200 receives a launch permission signal LPS from the payout control device 640, and receives a power failure detection signal POD from the power supply device 800 via the payout control device 640 when a power failure is detected.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the launch control apparatus 200. The launch control device 200 includes a launch control circuit 202 and a driver 204. The driver 204 supplies each drive control signal MCS1 to MCS4 to the firing motor 240 corresponding to each of the periodic pulse signals OUT1 to OUT4 output from the firing control circuit 202.

  The firing control circuit 202 is a phase separation circuit having a logic circuit (logic circuit), and outputs periodic pulse signals OUT1-OUT4 for stepping motors. Each of the periodic pulse signals OUT1-OUT4 is a pulse signal corresponding to each excitation phase determined by an excitation method such as two-phase excitation and 1-2 phase excitation. For example, the firing control circuit 202 may be a general phase separation logic circuit (pulse distribution circuit) for a stepping motor, and is composed of a programmable logic IC (Integrated Circuit) such as a PLD (Programmable Logic Device). Alternatively, a commercially available control IC for a stepping motor (for example, model number W2RF001WP) can be used.

  In the firing control circuit 202, a logic power supply voltage is input to the logic power supply voltage terminal VDD. The clock input terminals XT1 and XT2 are connected to a crystal oscillator 206 for generating a clock signal. The crystal oscillator 206 is connected to a frequency dividing circuit inside the firing control circuit 202, and a clock signal that is a source of the periodic pulse signal is generated. When the power failure detection signal POD is input to the reset terminal RST, the firing control circuit 202 is reset.

  In the logic configuration (logic configuration) of the firing control circuit 202, when the touch switch signal from the touch switch 120 is input to the enable terminal EN2 and the enable terminal EN2 becomes H level (high level), the generation of the periodic pulse signals OUT1-OUT4 is generated. Is allowed. When the firing stop switch signal from the firing stop switch 110 is input to the enable terminal EN4X and the enable terminal EN4X becomes H level (high level), the generation of the periodic pulse signals OUT1-OUT4 is prohibited. When the firing permission signal LPS from the dispensing control device 640 is input to the enable terminal EN3 and the enable terminal EN3 becomes H level (high level), the generation of the periodic pulse signals OUT1-OUT4 is permitted. For this reason, when the firing control circuit 202 receives the touch switch signal (operation detection signal) and the firing permission signal LPS and does not receive the firing stop switch signal, the firing motor 240 operates.

  FIG. 8 is a circuit diagram showing the configuration of the driver 204. The driver 204 has a plurality of terminals 1-16. The driver 204 is provided with a plurality of driver circuits 208a to 208g in parallel. Each driver circuit includes an amplifier circuit 210 (amplifier circuit) using a transistor and a diode 212. Each of the driver circuits 208a to 208g has a terminal 1-7 as an input terminal and a terminal 16-10 as an output terminal. The amplifier circuit 210 can amplify an input signal from the input terminal and output it from the output terminal. A pair of input terminals and output terminals (that is, terminal pairs) (1, 16) (2, 15) (3, 14) (4, 13) (5, 12) is connected to the amplifier circuit 210 of one driver circuit. doing.

  Terminal 8 is a ground terminal that is connected to ground and provides ground to driver circuits 208a-208g. A voltage is input to the terminal 9 from a connection line Vmot that supplies a power supply voltage to the firing motor 240 via the constant voltage diode 213. The common line COM is connected from the terminal 9 (power supply input terminal) to the diode 212 of the driver circuits 208a to 208g. The constant voltage diode 213 (zener diode) constitutes a suppression circuit that suppresses the driving voltage of the firing motor 240 to a predetermined voltage (for example, 32 V).

  FIG. 9 is a circuit diagram of each driver circuit 208. The amplifier circuit 210 of the driver circuit 208 is composed of two transistors (transistor array) Tr1, Tr2, etc. connected in Darlington connection. The emitter (E) side of the subsequent transistor Tr2 is connected to the ground via the terminal 8 and grounded. Periodic pulse signals OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4 are input to the driver circuits 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d, respectively, and drive control signals MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, and MCS4 are output as amplified signals. In this way, the drive control signals MCS1-MCS4 are supplied to the firing motor 240 in the form in which the periodic pulse signals OUT1-OUT4 are amplified.

  Further, in the firing control device 200, the touch switch signal from the touch switch 120 branches at the branch point 218 and is input to the driver 204 together with the firing control circuit 202 (see FIG. 8). The touch switch signal (operation detection signal) is input to the driver circuit 208e and output toward the payout control device 640. Then, the touch switch signal is output to the game control device 600 via the payout control device 640. In the driver circuit 208 e, the terminal 5 is an input terminal, the terminal 12 is an output terminal, and the terminal 12 is connected to the output line 220.

  The driver circuit 208e has an amplifier circuit 210 including a transistor, and is disposed in the middle of a circuit that outputs a touch switch signal (operation detection signal) from the touch switch 120 to the game control device 600, so that the signal passes through the driver circuit 208e. Is a restricting means for restricting the payout in one direction to the payout control device 640 side (that is, the game control device 600 side). As a result, even if noise (noise signal) occurs in the connection line for the touch switch signal in the cable between the launch control device 200 and the payout control device 640 or between the game control device 600 and the payout control device 640, the fire is generated. It does not enter the control circuit 202. In other words, the driver circuit 208e functions as noise blocking means from the payout control device 640 side (that is, the game control device 600 side) to the launch control device 200. Thereby, malfunctioning of the firing motor 240 can be prevented. Since the voltage of the touch switch signal (operation detection signal) does not exceed the predetermined voltage of the constant voltage diode 213, a simple driver circuit as shown in FIG. 8 can be used.

  Specifically, the amplifier circuit 210 of the driver circuit 208e includes a transistor (unidirectional transistor) that outputs a signal in one direction from the input side (base (B) side) to the output side (collector (C) side) or It has a transistor array. When the transistor of the amplifier circuit 210 is turned on by the touch switch signal (current) on the input side, a current flows between the collector (C) and the emitter (E), and the voltage on the output line 220 changes to change the touch switch signal on the output side. It becomes. For example, when the transistor of the amplifier circuit 210 is turned on, the voltage on the output line 220 changes from the power supply voltage of the connection line Vmot or a predetermined voltage of the constant voltage diode 213 to near the ground voltage. The amplifier circuit 210 has a circuit configuration (arrangement of transistors, resistors, and diodes) that allows noise that has entered from the collector-side terminal 12 to flow to the ground on the emitter (E) side without passing through the terminal 5 (input terminal) on the base side. (See FIG. 9). For this reason, noise intrusion from the terminal 12 (output terminal) can be prevented. Further, the diodes 212 of the driver circuits 208a to 208e prevent noise from entering the driver circuits 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d via the common line COM.

  The driver 204 uses terminals 5 and 12 other than the terminals 1-4 and 13-16 used to send the drive control signals MCS1 to MCS4 of the firing motor 240 among the plurality of terminals 1-7 and 10-16. Then, a touch switch signal (operation detection signal) is output to the game control device 600 via the driver circuit 208e. For this reason, the empty terminal of the driver 204 can be utilized, and countermeasures against noise from the payout control device 640 side (that is, the game control device 600 side) can be taken without increasing the number of parts.

  As an alternative to the configuration described above, launch control is performed from the payout control device 640 side (that is, the game control device 600 side) using an isolation amplifier in which the input side and the output side are electrically separated as the amplifier circuit 210 of the driver circuit 208e. Noise to the device 200 may be blocked. Further, a restricting means for restricting the signal passing direction to one direction of the payout control device 640 (that is, the game control device 600 side) from the branch point 218 to the game control device 600 such as on the output line 220 from the terminal 12. May be provided on the output circuit to block noise.

  The above is the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Next, a procedure in which the payout control device 640 outputs a touch switch signal to another control board (for example, the game control device 600) will be described.

[Touch switch signal transmission processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of touch switch signal transmission processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the flowchart of the process executed by the payout control device 640, the step code (number) is represented as “C ***”.

  The touch switch signal transmission process is executed in a timer interrupt process (not shown) of the payout control device 640.

  When the touch switch signal transmission process is executed, the payout control device 640 first determines whether there is a change in the touch state (C1001). Specifically, the payout control device 640 determines whether or not a change in the touch switch signal from the touch switch (touch sensor) 120 is detected. If there is no change in the touch state (the result of C1001 is “N”), this process is terminated.

  If there is a change in the touch state (the result of C1001 is “Y”), the payout control device 640 next determines whether or not the change in the state has changed from touch-off to touch-on (C1002). ).

  If the change in state is a change from touch-off to touch-on (the result of C1002 is “Y”), the payout control device 640 sets ON data of the touch switch signal to be output to the game control device 600 ( C1003), this processing is terminated.

  When the change in state is not a change from touch-off to touch-on (result of C1002 is “N”), that is, when the change in state is a change from touch-on to touch-off, the payout control device 640 Then, off data of the touch switch signal to be output to the game control device 600 is set (C1004), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the payout control device 640 outputs touch-on data or touch-off data to the game control device 600 immediately after receiving the touch switch signal. When the game control device 600 receives the touch-on data, the game control device 600 controls the production of a touch-on command (operation start command) based on the touch-on data after a certain period (for example, 32 ms, the first waiting period) has elapsed. Output to the device 700. In addition, when the game control device 600 receives touch-off data, the game control device 600 performs effect control on a touch-off command (operation end command) based on the touch-off data after a certain period (for example, 4000 ms, second waiting period) has elapsed. Output to the device 700.

  Receiving the touch-on / touch-off command, the effect control device 700 can cause the decoration device such as the frame decoration device 21, the effect device, and the display device 35 to perform an effect with an effect, based on the received command.

  The payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700 may be directly connected, and the touch-off data and the touch-on data may be directly output from the payout control device 640 to the effect control device 700 without going through the game control device 600. .

  Next, specific control by the game control device 600 will be described.

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, a main process executed by the game microcomputer 611 by the game control device 600 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the latter half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 600 (game microcomputer 611), the step code (number) is represented as “A ***”.

  The main process is started when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. For example, it is executed when a gaming machine is turned on to start business at a game hall or when a power failure is restored.

  When the main process is executed, the game control device 600 first prohibits interruption (A1101). Next, an interrupt vector setting process for setting a vector address indicating a jump destination executed when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1102). Further, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like is set (A1103). Further, the state of the input port 623 is read (A1104), and the interrupt processing mode is set (A1105).

  Next, the game control device 600 sets a power-on delay timer for waiting until the programs of the subordinate control devices (the payout control device (payout board)) 640 and the effect control device 700 are normally started (A1106). . For example, the power-on delay timer is set to wait for 3 seconds. By controlling in this way, when the power is turned on, the game control device 600 is started first and the command is transmitted to the subordinate control device before the start-up of the payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700 is completed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid that the subordinate control device misses the transmitted command. Therefore, the game control device 600 serves as standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying activation of the main control means (game control device 600) and waiting for activation of the subordinate control device when the power is turned on.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the input port 623, and the operation of the initialization switch can be reliably detected by reading the state of the input port 623 before the start of the standby time. In other words, if the status of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch is continuously operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the setting of the power-on delay timer is completed, the game control device 600 executes a process of monitoring a power failure (A1107 to A1111). First, the game control device 600 sets the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (A1107). The power failure monitoring signal is checked by reading the power failure monitoring signal output from the power supply device 800. The number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal is, for example, twice. When a power failure occurs, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on.

  Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1108). Then, the determination of A1108 is repeated for the number of checks set in the processing of A1107 (A1109).

  When the gaming control device 600 has measured that the power failure monitoring signal is ON for the number of checks (the result of A1109 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines that a power failure has occurred and until the power is turned off. stand by. In this way, by checking the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined number of checks, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like. That is, the game control device 600 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 600 is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at power-on.

  Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1109 is “N”), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 600 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1110), It is determined whether or not the value of the power-on delay timer is 0 (A1111). If the value of the power-on delay timer is not 0 (the result of A1111 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not elapsed, the process returns to A1107.

  On the other hand, when the value of the power-on delay timer is 0 (the result of A1111 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has elapsed, the game control device 600 reads / writes RWM (RAM, EEPROM, etc.) Access to the read / write memory is permitted (A1112). Further, all output ports are set to off (no output) (A1113). In addition, the serial port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 611 is set not to be used (A1114). In the present embodiment, the game control device 600 performs serial communication with the effect control device 700.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the initialization switch signal in the power supply device 800 is set to ON (A1115). The initialization switch signal is a signal for setting whether or not to start a game in an initialized state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  For example, if the power is turned off while the probability change game state is closed when the store is closed and the power is turned on when the store opens the next day, the initialization switch signal is turned on so that the game starts in the initialized state. Is set. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again after a power failure, the initialization switch signal is turned off so that the game machine is not initialized in order to resume the game as close to the gaming state as possible before the power failure. Is set.

  When the initialization switch signal is set to OFF (the result of A1115 is “N”), the game control device 600 checks whether the data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal (A1116). , A1117). More specifically, the power outage inspection area includes a power outage inspection area 1 and a power outage inspection area 2. The power failure inspection area 1 stores power failure inspection area check data 1, and the power failure inspection area 2 stores power failure inspection area check data 2. In the process of A1116, it is determined whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 1 stored in the power failure inspection area 1 is normal. Similarly, in the process of A1117, it is determined whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 2 stored in the power failure inspection area 2 is normal.

  When it is determined that the power failure inspection area check data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal (results of A1116 and A1117 are “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 calculates verification data called a checksum. The checksum calculation process is executed (A1118).

  Then, the game control device 600 compares the checksum value calculated in the checksum calculation process with the checksum value calculated when the power is turned off, and determines whether or not these values match ( A1119).

  On the other hand, in the game control device 600, when the initialization switch signal is set to ON (result of A1109 is “Y”), the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal (result of A1116 or A1117 is “N”). If the checksum value at the time of power-off does not match the checksum value calculated in the processing of A1118 (the result of A1119 is “N”), the initialization processing from A1140 to A1143 in FIG. Run. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  If the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value at power-off (the result of A1119 is “Y”), the game control device 600 initializes because the power failure process has been executed normally. The initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the power area (A1120). For example, information for determining whether or not the information at the time of power failure has been normally stored is stored in an area (power failure inspection area, checksum, error) in RWM (read / write memory: RAM in the embodiment) Clear the related information and the area for storing information for monitoring fraud).

  Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the game state at the time of the power outage is a high probability state from the area for storing the game state in the RWM (A1121). If it is determined that the probability is not high (the result of A1121 is “N”), the processing after A1124 is executed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a high probability state (the result of A1121 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the high probability notification flag to ON and performs the high probability notification. Save to the flag area (A1122). Subsequently, the LED of the third gaming state display unit 59 provided in the collective display device 50 is set to ON (lighted) (A1123).

  Further, the game control device 600 transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 700 (A1124). The special figure game process number is a number indicating the state of the special figure game, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM when a power failure occurs. In this way, by transmitting the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 700, the game can be resumed in a state as close as possible to before the power failure occurs.

  Here, a case where the initialization process is executed will be described. As described above, the initialization process is executed when a gaming machine that has been normally powered off is activated or when it cannot return to the state before the occurrence of a power failure.

  In the initialization process, the game control device 600 first clears all work areas before the access prohibited area (A1140). Further, all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared (A1141). Then, the initial value for power-on is saved in the initialized area (A1142). Further, a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 700 (A1143), and the processes after A1125 are executed.

  The power failure recovery command transmitted in A1124 and the power-on command transmitted in A1143 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and a decorative special diagram 1 indicating the number of suspensions in FIGS. A hold number command, a decoration special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. If the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, the customer waiting demo command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  When the processing of A1124 or A1143 ends, the game control device 600 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 611 (clock generator). (A1125).

  The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 611. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 613 and the CTC circuit described above. The timer interrupt signal is a signal for causing the CPU 611a to generate a timer interrupt with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) based on the divided signal. The random number update trigger signal (CTC) is supplied to the random number generation circuit based on the divided signal, and the random number generation circuit serves as a trigger for updating the random number.

  When the CTC circuit is activated, the game control device 600 performs activation setting for the random number generation circuit (A1126). Specifically, the CPU 611a executes processing such as setting a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. At this time, it may be checked whether the random number generation circuit operates normally. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the bit transposition pattern is a different bit arrangement (placement after bit transposition in the lower stage) by replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (placement before the upper stage bit transposition) in a predetermined order. ) Is a pattern that defines how to replace the data when it is stored. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Furthermore, the game control device 600 uses the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on as the initial values (start values) of the corresponding various initial value random numbers. (A1127). Thereafter, the game control device 600 permits an interrupt (A1128).

  Note that the random number generation circuit in the CPU 611a of the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed each time the power is turned on, and initial values of various initial value random numbers are based on the initial value of the soft random number register. By setting a value (start value), it becomes possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to acquire illegal random numbers. The various initial value random numbers include, for example, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, a jackpot symbol random number 2), and a random number for determining a hit of a normal variation display game (a hit random number).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1129). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number generated in the random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number are soft random numbers generated by software. Note that the source of various random numbers is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the big hit random number may be a software random number, or the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number may be a hardware random number. .

  Further, after the initial value random number update process is executed, the game control device 600 sets the number of times of checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 800 and read through the port and the data bus (A1130). Normally, a value of 2 or more is set as the number of checks. It is possible to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred by checking the power failure monitoring signal. The game control device 600 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1131). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on, that is, when there is no power failure (result of A1131 is “N”), the initial value random number update processing of A1129 is executed again, and the processing from A1129 to A1131 is executed repeatedly ( Loop processing).

  Further, by permitting an interrupt (A1128) before the initial value random number update process (A1129), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process can be executed with priority. Become. Accordingly, since the timer interrupt process cannot be executed until the execution of the initial value random number update process is completed, it is possible to avoid a shortage of time for executing various processes included in the interrupt process.

  In the initial value random number update process (A1129), the initial value random number update process may be executed by a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. However, when the initial value random number update process is executed in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt is issued during the initial value random number update process in the main process in order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process in both processes. It is prohibited to release the interrupt after updating the initial random number. However, if the initial value random number update process is not executed in the timer interrupt process and the initial value random number update process is executed only in the main process as in this embodiment, the interrupt can be canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is no problem, and there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified. Further, various random numbers may be updated not in the timer interrupt process but in the main process.

  The detection of the occurrence of a power failure (check of the power failure monitoring signal) may be executed by a timer interrupt process. At this time, the detection result may be monitored by the main process, or may be waited until it is reset.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON (the result of A1131 is “Y”), the gaming control device 600 indicates that the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal has been continuously detected is detected. It is determined whether the number of checks set in the process of A1130 has been reached (A1132). When the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON is not reached the number of checks (result of A1132 is “N”), whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON again. Is determined (A1131). That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks.

  When the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on reaches the number of checks (the result of A1132 is “Y”), the game control device 600 considers that a power failure has occurred. Then, the process when a power failure occurs is executed (A1133 to A1139).

  The game control device 600 prohibits interruption (A1133) and sets all output ports to off (A1134). Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (A1135), and further, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (A1136).

  Further, the game control device 600 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off (A1137), and saves (saves) the calculated checksum value in the checksum area of the RWM ( A1138). Finally, access to the RWM is prohibited so that the contents of the RWM are not changed (A1139), and the system waits until the gaming machine 1 is turned off. In this way, by saving check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating and storing the checksum at the time of power-off, the information stored in the RWM before power-off is correctly backed up. It is possible to determine when the power is turned on again.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, details of the checksum calculation process (A1118) in the main process described above will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a checksum calculation processing procedure according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets the start address of the RWM as the calculated address start value (A1401), sets the number of repetitions (A1402), and sets “0” as the calculated value (A1403). The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  After that, the game control apparatus 600 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1404), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1405), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1406). It is then determined whether the checksum calculation has been completed (A1407). If the calculation has not been completed (the result of A1407 is “N”), the process returns to A1404 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (the result of A1407 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, details of the initial value random number update process (A1129) in the main process described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first updates the winning initial value random number by +1 (A1501), and updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1502). Then, the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (A1503), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is a symbol that determines the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing (game control device)]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic (for example, 1 millisecond cycle) timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 611a.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 600 first saves the register by moving the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM (A1601). In this embodiment, a Z80 microcomputer is used as the game microcomputer. The Z80 microcomputer is provided with a front register and a back register, and the processing of A1601 can be implemented by saving the values held in the front register to the back register.

  Next, the game control apparatus 600 takes in input signals from various sensors and switches inputted via the input unit 620, and executes an input process for reading the state of each input port (A1602). The various sensors include a first start port switch 601, a second start port switch 602, a conventional gate switch 603, lower count switches 605a to 605m, an upper count switch 606, and the like. In the input process, the input information is confirmed by performing chattering removal or the like on the input signal.

  Further, the game control device 600 executes output processing for transmitting output data related to game control set in various processes to the effect control device 700 and the payout control device 640 (A1603). The output data is information for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid, and the solenoids to be controlled include, for example, a big prize opening solenoid 28 and a general electric solenoid 27. The output process also includes a process of outputting game data to an information collecting terminal device (not shown) that collects game data in the gaming machine.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes payout command transmission processing for transmitting (outputting) the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 640 (A1604). For example, a prize ball command specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout device is transmitted.

  Further, the game control device 600 executes a random number update process 1 for updating the jackpot symbol random number 1 and the jackpot symbol random number 2 (A1605), and subsequently calculates a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the special diagram variation display game. Random number update processing 2 to be updated is executed (A1606). In random number update processing 1 and random number update processing 2, in order to give randomness to various random numbers, the values of counters corresponding to various random numbers (big hit random number counter, hit random number counter, presentation determination random number counter, etc.) are incremented by one To do.

  After that, the game control device 600 executes a prize opening switch / error monitoring process for monitoring various prize opening switches and the like, and monitoring errors such as unauthorized opening of a frame (A1607). The various winning opening switches include, for example, a first starting opening switch 601, a second starting opening switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning opening switches 604a to 604n, lower count switches 605a to 605m, and an upper count switch 606. In the prize opening switch / error monitoring process, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from these switches. As for error monitoring, the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 are targeted for unauthorized opening.

  Further, the game control device 600 executes a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game (A1608). Details of the special game process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, two types of special figure game processing may be prepared for normal time and big hit time corresponding to the result of the variable display game to be started.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a general game process for performing a process related to the general map display game (A1609).

  Next, the game control device 600 executes touch sensor monitoring processing for detecting on / off of the touch switch (touch sensor) 120 and transmitting a command to the effect control device 700 (A1610).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a customer waiting demo return process (A1611). The customer waiting demo return process is a process for returning from the customer waiting demo (customer waiting demo state) in which the variable display device 35 displays a customer waiting demo screen (customer waiting screen, demo screen). The customer waiting demonstration screen is a demonstration screen or image that is displayed to appeal to a player or prevent screen burn-in when a predetermined condition is satisfied when no game is being played. Specifically, when the touch switch 120 is not detected (when no touch switch signal is input), the game control device 600 prepares a customer waiting demo end command. Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory. The customer waiting demonstration end command is a command for ending the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 720 of the effect control device 700 displays on the variable display device 35 when waiting for the customer of the gaming machine 1. Transmitted to the apparatus 700. Details of the customer waiting demo return processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a segment LED editing process for controlling the display contents of the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation game and various information relating to the game is executed (A1612). Specifically, the parameters for outputting the results of the special map variation display game and the general map variation display game to the segment LED (for example, the collective display device 50) are edited.

  The game control device 600 checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 23 and executes a magnet error monitoring process for determining whether there is an abnormality (A1613). Further, the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24 is checked, and radio wave fraud monitoring processing for determining whether there is an abnormality is executed (A1614). When the occurrence of an abnormality is detected, a notification sound is output from the speaker 10 or the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on to notify the outside.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes an external information editing process for editing various signals output from the external information terminal 660 (A1615).

  Then, the game control device 600 clears the interrupt request and declares the end of the interrupt (A1616). Thereafter, the register temporarily saved in the process of A1601 is restored (A1617), the interrupt and timer interrupt by the prohibited external device are permitted (A1618), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. .

[Touch sensor monitoring processing]
Next, details of the touch sensor monitoring process (A1610) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of touch sensor monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 17B illustrates a processing procedure in which monitoring processing of a firing stop switch signal is added to the flowchart illustrated in FIG. 17A. Show.

  As described above, when the game control device 600 receives a touch switch signal from the payout control device 640, the game control device 600 outputs a command based on the touch switch signal to the effect control device 700 after a certain period of time has elapsed. In particular, when touch-off data is received, the command is output to the effect control device 700 after waiting for a longer time than when touch-on data is received. This process is a process of setting a standby period according to the received touch switch signal and setting a command to be output to the effect control device 700 after the standby period has elapsed.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not a touch switch signal has been received (A1701). Since the touch switch signal is in the ON state (high level) while the player operates the operation unit 15 (launch handle), whether or not the signal state from the payout control device 640 has actually changed in A1701. Determine whether.

  A procedure when there is a change in ON / OFF of touch switch signal detection that the operation is started or the operation is stopped from the step to the step A1712 will be described.

When the touch switch signal is received, that is, when the signal state has changed (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 600 then determines whether the received touch switch signal is on-data. It is determined whether or not (A1702).

  The situation in which the game control device 600 receives the ON data of the touch switch signal means that the player starts operating the operation unit 15 and the signal rises from OFF to ON (time t1 of the touch switch on the main board shown in FIG. 87). )) And the game ball launching is started.

  When the received touch switch signal is ON data (the result of A1702 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the touchoff flag has been saved (A1703). The touch-off flag is a flag provided to determine whether or not there is an untransmitted touch-off command. When the touch-off flag is saved, the game control device 600 has received touch-off data, but the touch-off command has not yet been set because the standby period has not elapsed (the touch-off command is output). (Not done).

  When the touch-off flag is not saved, that is, when there is no untransmitted touch-off command (result of A1703 is “N”), the game control device 600 saves the touch-on flag (A1704), and the command The transmission timer is set to 32 ms (A1705). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  The reason why the command output to the effect control device 700 is output after waiting for 32 ms when touch-on data is received is to prevent the game control device 600 from outputting a command based on noise. In addition, when the standby period is long, the time lag generated between the player's operation and the start of the production of the gaming machine 1 increases, and the responsiveness of the production to the operation decreases.

  On the other hand, if the received touch switch signal is not on-data (the result of A1702 is “N”), the signal falls to a low level, that is, the game ball launching operation has been stopped. The apparatus 600 determines whether or not the touch-on flag has been saved (A1706). The touch-on flag is a flag provided to determine whether or not there is an untransmitted touch-on command.

  When the touch-on flag is not saved, that is, when there is no untransmitted touch-on command (result of A1706 is “N”), the game control device 600 saves the touch-off flag (A1707) and touches. It is determined whether or not the effect flag is saved (A1708).

  The touch effect flag is a flag saved when, for example, the operation of the operation unit 15 and the screen effect in the change display game are linked in a specific change pattern.

  When the touch effect flag is saved (the result of A1708 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the command transmission timer to 32 ms in order to maintain a sense of link between the operation of the operation unit 15 and the screen effect. (A1705), and this process ends. In FIG. 90, the output timing of the touch-on command and the touch-off command when the touch effect flag is saved will be described based on the time chart.

  When the touch effect flag is not saved (result of A1708 is “N”), in order to suppress frequent command transmission and reduce the processing load of the effect control device 700 which is the subject of the present application, the game control device In step S600, the command transmission timer is set to 4000 ms (A1709), and this process ends.

  In step A1703, when the touch-off flag is saved, that is, when the player releases the operation unit 15 and returns to the operation within 4 seconds (the result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control The device 600 clears the touch-off flag (A1710), and resets the command transmission timer (A1712). By resetting the command transmission timer set to 4000 ms, the transmission schedule of the touch-off command based on releasing the hand for a moment is canceled, and the processing load of the effect control device 700 is reduced.

  If the touch-on flag is saved in step A1706, that is, if the game control device 600 detects noise and the touch switch signal rises for a moment (the result of A1706 is “Y”), The game control device 600 clears the touch-on flag (A1711) and resets the command transmission timer (A1712). By resetting the command transmission timer set to 32 ms, an unnecessary command transmission schedule based on noise is canceled, and the processing load of the effect control device 700 is reduced.

  Next, a processing procedure in the case where the operation is continuing or the operation is stopped will be described. In step A1701, when the touch switch signal is not received (the result of A1701 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the command transmission timer has expired (A1714).

  If the command transmission timer has not expired (the result of A1714 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends this processing because it is in a waiting period until command transmission.

  If the command transmission timer has expired (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control device 600 next determines whether or not the touch-on flag has been saved (A1715). In step A1712, the command transmission timer is reset and the timer is not started, and it is determined that the command transmission timer is up.

  When the touch-on flag is saved, that is, when there is an untransmitted touch-on command (result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control device 600 clears the touch-on flag (A1716), and touches The on command is saved (A1717).

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a saved touch-on command setting process (A1718), and ends this process.

  When the touch-on flag is not saved (the result of A1715 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the touch-off flag has been saved (A1719). If the touch-off flag is not saved (the result of A1719 is “N”), there is no untransmitted command, and then this process is terminated. The case where the result is “N” in step A1719 is a case where the command transmission timer is reset in step 8012 and the command scheduled to be transmitted is cancelled.

  When the touch-off flag is saved, that is, when there is an unsent touch-off command (the result of A1719 is “Y”), the game control device 600 clears the touch-off flag (A1720) and touches. The off command is saved (A1721).

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a setting process for the saved touch-off command (A1718), and ends this process.

  As described above, when the operation of the operation unit 15 is stopped for a short time, the touch-off command due to the operation being stopped and the touch-on command due to the return to the operation are not transmitted. The processing burden of 700 is reduced.

  Further, even when noise is detected, the touch-on command and the touch-off command based on the noise are not transmitted, so that the processing load on the effect control device 700 is reduced.

  In addition, when a predetermined condition is established and the steering operation and the effect of the gaming machine 1 are linked (the touch effect is executed), the touch-off command is also transmitted after the lapse of the standby period of 32 ms. Even if a simple operation input is made, it is possible to produce an effect that maintains a sense of link between the player's operation and the display content.

  Note that the command transmission timer may be set to 4000 ms during normal operation, and 32 ms may be set when performing a touch effect. For example, a configuration in which a touch effect is executed in the case of a specific variation pattern and the standby period of the touch-off command is set to 32 ms during the execution of the specific variation pattern is conceivable. Further, as another configuration, it is possible to execute a touch effect during the reach and set the standby period of the touch-off command to 32 ms during the reach. In this case, the frequency of unnecessary command transmission due to noise or the like can be reduced, and further, the processing load on the effect control device 700 can be reduced. In addition, the processing procedure in the effect control device 700 is simplified, and the processing load on the effect control device 700 can be reduced.

  Further, in the touch effect, even if the frame decoration device 21 or the frame effect device 22 is operated in accordance with the operation input of the operation unit 15, for example, the light emission mode of the decoration device such as an LED arranged in the frame is changed. Good. Furthermore, the board decoration device 760 and the board effect device 770 may be operated according to the operation input of the operation unit 15.

  In addition, the launch stop switch signal may be monitored in the touch sensor monitoring process so that the operation input of the launch stop switch 110 can be reflected in the effect of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 17B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the touch sensor monitoring process to which the monitoring process of the firing stop switch signal is added.

  In step A1701, when the touch switch signal is not received (the result of A1701 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the firing stop switch signal is received (A1713). Similarly to the determination at A1701, the determination at step A1713 also determines whether or not the state of the received firing stop switch signal has changed.

  When the firing stop switch signal is received (the result of A1713 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the received firing stop switch signal is a signal for switching from OFF to ON (A1722). ). If the firing stop switch signal is a signal for switching from off to on (result of A1722 is “Y”), the firing stop switch on command is saved (A1723), and command setting processing is executed (A1718).

  When the received firing stop switch signal is not a signal for switching from off to on (result of A1724 is “N”), the firing stop switch off command is saved (A1724), and command setting processing is executed (A1718). .

  On the other hand, if the firing stop switch signal is not received in step A1714 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the command transmission timer has timed out after step A1714. Execute the process.

  In this way, by transmitting a command based on the firing stop switch signal to the effect control device 700, the operation of the launch stop switch 110 and the effect can be linked. Note that a certain waiting period may be provided until the launch stop switch signal transmits a command. By providing the standby period, unnecessary commands due to frequent on / off operations of the firing stop switch 110 and signal changes based on noise are not transmitted, so the processing load on the effect control device 700 is reduced.

  As described above, the game control means can operate the operation detection command (touch-on command or touch-off) based on the operation detection signal (touch switch signal) transmitted in response to the change in the operation state by the operation detection means (touch switch). Function as command transmission control means for transmitting (command).

[Command setting processing]
Next, details of the command setting process (A1718, etc.) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of command setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. The game control device 600 first writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A1801), reads the serial transmission buffer status (A1802), and determines whether a command is being transmitted (A1803). ).

  When the command is being transmitted (result of A1803 is “Y”), the game control device 600 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A1806). In addition, when the command is not being transmitted (result of A1803 is “N”), the game control device 600 initializes the transmission circuit because the circuit may be abnormal (A1804), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) Is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer (A1805), and then command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (A1806).

  Then, the game control device 600 reads the serial transmission buffer status (A1807) and determines whether a command is being transmitted (A1808). If a command is being transmitted (the result of A1808 is “Y”), the command setting process ends. If the command is not being transmitted (the result of A1808 is “N”), the circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (A1809), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is re-sent in the serial transmission buffer. Write (A1810), and the command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 700 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 600 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 700, it is not necessary to capture commands within the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. Note that commands may also be transmitted to the payout control device 640 by serial communication.

[Resume waiting for customer demonstration]
Next, details of the customer waiting demo return process (A1611) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a customer waiting demo return process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 checks the customer waiting demo flag area (part of the RWM) and determines whether or not the customer waiting demo flag is set to ON (A1901, A1902). The customer waiting demonstration flag is a flag that is turned on and saved when the touch switch 120 is not detected in the special figure routine process (FIG. 38) described later.

  When the waiting customer demonstration flag is on (the result of A1902 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the touch switch 120 is detected, that is, whether or not the touch switch signal is input. Is determined (A1903). When the touch switch 120 is detected, that is, when the touch switch 120 is in the ON state (the result of A1903 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A1904), and the gaming machine 1 enters the customer waiting demo state. A customer waiting demo end command is prepared as customer waiting demo end information to be ended (A1905), and command setting processing for setting the command is performed (A1906). Note that the gaming microcomputer 611 that performs such a customer waiting demo return process and the output unit 630 that outputs a command constitute customer waiting demo information transmitting means for transmitting customer waiting demo end information.

  As a result, even if the variable display game is not started during the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen on the variable display device 35, if the operation of the operation unit 15 is detected by the touch switch 120, the customer waiting demo flag is cleared. The display of the customer waiting demonstration screen ends. Note that the game control device 600 determines that the touch switch 120 is detected when the touch switch signal (detection signal) from the touch switch 120 is input via the payout control device 640.

  Thus, the absence of detection of the touch switch 120 is a return condition (end condition) from the customer waiting state (customer waiting demo state), and when this return condition is satisfied, the return process (A1904-A1906) is performed. The waiting demo ends.

  On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo flag is not turned on (the result of A1902 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the current customer waiting demo return process. Alternatively, when the touch switch 120 is not detected, that is, when the touch switch 120 is in the off state (the result of A1903 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the current customer waiting demo return process.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (A1602) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of input processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 623 (A2001). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A2002).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A2003), and unused bit data is prepared (A2004), and then the bit data to be inverted is prepared ( A2005). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A2006), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 622b is prepared (A2007), and the switch reading process (A2008) is performed.

  Next, unused bit data is prepared (A2009), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A2010). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (A2011), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 622a is prepared (A2012), the switch reading process (A2013) is performed, and the input process is performed. Exit.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (A2008, A2013) in the above-described input process (FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the switch reading process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A2101). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A2102), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A2103), and then saved in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area. (Store) (A2104). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (A2105).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 600 performs the second reading of the state of the signal fetched into the target input port (A2106). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A2107), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A2108), and then saved in the port input state 2 of the target switch control area. (Store) (A2109). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same status bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (A2110), and the deterministic bit pattern and port input status 2 are ANDed to confirm this time Bits are set (A2111).

  Next, the game control device 600 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same bit in the first and second readings is 0, and a different bit is 1 (A2112). The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (A2113). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (A2114), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (A2115), and the switch is read. End the process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1603) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of output processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 outputs (resets) off-data to a port 631c (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A2201). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 631b for outputting the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 27 and the big prize opening solenoids 28a and 28b is synthesized and output (A2202).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (A2203), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A2204). The acquired data is output to the digit output port 631d (A2205). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A2206), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 631c (A2207).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 is loaded and combined, and output to the external information output port 631e (A2208). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 650. (A2209). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 650 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 650. (A2210).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 650 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 650. (A2211). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 650 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 650 ( A2212). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 650 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 650. (A2213), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1604) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a payout command transmission process procedure according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 checks the number of winnings to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter area (A2301). If there is no count number (the result of A2301 is “N”), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (A2302), and check of the counting number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (A2303). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (the result of A2303 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (the result of A2303 is “N”), the process returns to A2301 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in A2301 that there is a count number (the result of A2301 is “Y”), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (−1) (A2304), and the winning number counter area The payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the address is acquired (A2305). Then, a strobe off timer for measuring the off time of the strobe signal indicating whether data reading is valid or invalid (for example, the time for maintaining the low level, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (A2306), and the payout command acquired in A2305 above (Negative logic data) and off-state (low level) strobe signals are output to the port 631a (see FIG. 3) (A2307).

  Thereafter, the strobe off timer is updated by -1 (A2308), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe off timer is 0, that is, whether the off time set in A2306 has elapsed (A2309). If the value of the strobe off timer is not 0 (the result of A2309 is “N”), that is, if the off time has not elapsed, the process returns to A2307. Further, when the value of the strobe off timer is 0 (the result of A2309 is “Y”), that is, when the off time has elapsed, the negative logic output that measures the remaining output time of negative logic data (for example, 0.030 ms) The remaining timer is set (A2310).

  Next, a payout command (negative logic data) is output, and an on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 631a (A2311). Then, the negative logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (A2312), and it is determined whether the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the negative logic data set in A2310 has ended (A2313). . If the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is not 0 (the result of A2313 is “N”), that is, if the output time of the negative logic data has not ended, the process returns to A2311. Further, when the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0 (the result of A2313 is “Y”), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data is completed, the negative logic payout command data is inverted and the positive logic is output. Is issued command data (A2314).

  Next, a strobe on remaining timer for measuring the remaining strobe signal on time (high level time, eg, 0.015 ms) is set (A2315), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in A2314 and the on state ( A high level strobe signal is output to the port 631a (A2316). Thereafter, the remaining strobe-on timer is updated by -1 (A2317), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining strobe-on timer is 0, that is, whether the on-time set in A2315 has ended (A2318). If the value of the remaining strobe on timer is not 0 (the result of A2318 is “N”), that is, if the ON time has not expired, the process returns to A2316. Further, when the value of the remaining strobe on timer is 0 (the result of A2318 is “Y”), that is, when the on time has expired, the positive logic for counting the remaining output time (eg, 0.030 ms) of the positive logic data. The remaining output timer is set (A2319).

  Thereafter, a payout command (positive logic data) is output, and an off state (low level) strobe signal is output to the port 631a (A2320). Then, the positive logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (A2321), and it is determined whether the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the positive logic data set in A2319 has ended (A2322). . If the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is not 0 (the result of A2322 is “N”), that is, if the output time has not expired, the process returns to A2320. Further, when the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0 (the result of A2322 is “Y”), that is, when it is finished, information on the number of winning balls to be paid out transmitted from the game control device 600 to the external device. The main winning ball remaining number update process (A2323) is set, and the command transmission process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 640, and the payout control device 640 pays out the game ball based on this payout command. As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. By making a request to the game control device 600, it is possible to receive an accurate command.

[Main prize ball remaining number update processing]
Next, details of the main winning ball remaining number update process (A2323) in the payout command transmission process (FIG. 23) described above will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of main prize ball remaining number update processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In this main award ball remaining number update process, a main award ball signal to be output to an external device is set every time the number of award balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). To do. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 640 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  The game control device 600 first adds the value of the remaining prize ball number area and the number of payouts (A2401). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not reach a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored. In this process, the value of the remaining prize ball area is stored. The value of a positive logic payout command is added as the number of payouts of newly generated prize balls. Then, the added value is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (A2402).

  After that, the game control device 600 subtracts 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal from the value of the remaining prize ball area (A2403), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more ( A2404). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (the result of A2404 is “N”), the main winning ball remaining number update process is terminated. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by 1 (A2405), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area. (A2406), it returns to A2403.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, details of the random number update process 1 (A1605) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of random number update processing 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random number 1, and jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A2501). If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A2501 is “N”), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A2504). Also, if the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A2502). The next initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A2503). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A2504).

  When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A2504 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting ( A2507). When the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A2504 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (A2505), and the next big hit symbol random number 1 is loaded. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A2506). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A2507).

  When the jackpot symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A2507 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the random number update processing 1. When the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A2507 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (A2508), and the next big hit symbol random number 2 is loaded. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A2509), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, details of the random number update process 2 (A1606) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of random number update processing 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  First, the game control device 600 updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number to be updated from among the plurality of random numbers to be updated (A2601). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A2602). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A2603). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 is, for example, a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. A register value to which a random value is set is loaded (A2604). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (A2605). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A2606). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A2606 is “Y”), the remaining value by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as “Y”) This is referred to as a masked value) and is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A2607), and the process proceeds to A2609. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A2606 is “N”), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value. (A2608), the process proceeds to A2609. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A2609), and if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A2609 is “Y”), the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) Is set (A2610), and the process proceeds to A2612. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A2609 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value and the value of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. (1 byte) is set (A2611), and the process proceeds to A2612.

  In A2612, the game control device 600 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in A2607 or A2608 to the random value as a new random value, and determines whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in A2603. (A2613). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A2613 is “N”), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A2615). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A2613 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (A2614). Is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (A2615).

  Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A2616), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A2616 is “N”), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A2616 is “Y”), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A2617), the random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the game control device 600 updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the game control device 600 changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the start winning opening 37 and the normal variation winning device 38. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining.

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
Next, details of the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (A1607) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a winning opening switch / error monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 receives a winning port monitoring table 1 (for example, a detection signal from a count switch) corresponding to one of the lower count switches 605a to 605m in the lower large winning port (first special variable winning device 41). The data indicating the port number and the bit position in the port of the signal are stored) (A2701). Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (A2702) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even if the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switches 605a to 605m in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 41) is prepared (A2703), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and normal. An illegal & winning monitoring process (A2704) for detecting a special winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 606 in the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 42) is prepared (A2705), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & prize winning monitoring process (A2706) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (second start opening switch 602) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (A2707), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and an illegal & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning. (A2708) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the winning opening switch (here, the first start opening switch 601 and the winning opening switches 604a to 604n of the general winning opening 40) that do not require fraud monitoring processing (A2709), and the number of winning is updated. A winning counter updating process (A2710) is performed.

  Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is updated (A2711). Thereafter, according to the value of the error scan counter, any one of the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, the chute ball switch signal from the dispensing control device 640, the overflow switch signal, and the dispensing abnormality status signal The gaming machine error monitoring table 1 for setting the error monitoring based on the above is prepared (A2712). Then, an error check process (A2713) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the error scan counter is 3 (A2714). If the value of the error scan counter is 3 (the result of A2714 is “Y”), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated. To do. In this case, there is no error monitoring target in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 referred to next. If the error scan counter value is not 3 (the result of A2714 is “N”), the front frame opening detection switch 25, the glass frame opening detection switch 26, the connector disconnection of the switch, etc., depending on the error scan counter value. A gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring based on any of the abnormality detection signals 2 output by the occurrence of (A2715). Then, an error check process (A2716) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed, and the winning prize switch / error monitoring process is terminated.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, details of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (A2302, A2304, A2306, A2308) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process (FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of fraud & prize winning monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  This fraud & prize winning monitoring process includes the lower count switches 605a to 605m of the first special variable winning device 41, the upper count switch 606 of the second special variable winning device 42, and the second start port switch 602 of the normal variable winning device 38. Is performed on As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 41 and 42) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize-winning device 38), it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game balls to pay out the prize balls. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  The game control device 600 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error (A2801), and determines whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2802). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 41 is opened when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the lower count switches 605a to 605m. When the switch is the up-count switch 606, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 42 is opened. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the second start opening switch 602, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning apparatus 38 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2803). When there is no input to the target winning a prize mouth switch (result of A2803 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2812). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2803 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2804), and the illegal winning number after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether (for example, 5) has been exceeded (A2805).

  The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the player from judging that the signal is fraudulent when the prize is received or when noise is added to the signal, and is not simply judged as an error although it is not illegal.

  Then, when the number of determinations is not exceeded (the result of A2805 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2810). If the number of determinations is exceeded (the result of A2805 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (A2806), and the initial value is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (A2807). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (A2808), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (A2809), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2820).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2802 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2810), and updates the winning number counter for setting the winning ball Processing (A2811) is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2812), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (A2813). If update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2813 is “N”), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (the result of A2813 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2814). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when there is one lower count switch 605a to 605m with an error monitoring target prize opening switch, and when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is another lower count switch 605a to 605m. Is not allowed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated several times with respect to the fraudulent notification about the first special variation winning device 41 and to be up in half of the prescribed time (for example, 60000 ms). Yes. Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 606 or the second start port switch 602, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 determines whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2815). If the value is not 0 (the result of A2815 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, The winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (the result of A2815 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the target illegal release command is prepared (A2816), and the illegal winning is canceled as an illegal flag. A flag is prepared (A2817). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2818).

  When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2818 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, The target illegal winning number is cleared (A2819), and the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2820). In addition, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2818 is “N”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2820).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2820 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. When the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (result of A2820 is “N”), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2821), and the command setting process is executed. (A2822), and the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 700 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 700 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the details of the winning number counter updating process (A2710) in the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of winning number counter update processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first acquires the number of winning-port switches to be monitored from the winning-port monitoring table (A2901), and determines whether there is an input (more accurately, an input change) to the target winning-port switch (A2902). ).

  When there is no input (the result of A2902 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2907). If there is an input (the result of A2902 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded (A2903), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2904), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs ( A2905). If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2905 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area (A2906), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2907). . If an overflow has occurred (result of A2905 is “Y”), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2907).

  When the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2907 is “N”), the game control device 600 returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target prize opening switch (A2902). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2907 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Error check processing]
Next, details of the error check process (A2713, A2716) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process (FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of error check processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first obtains an error monitoring table corresponding to the error scan counter (A3001), and determines whether a switch (including a signal) to be monitored is on, that is, a state indicating an error. (A3002).

  When the switch is not on (result of A3002 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares an error release flag as an error flag (A3003), and prepares a target error notification end command (A3004). Thereafter, the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A3005), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (A3009).

  On the other hand, when the switch is on (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares an error occurrence flag as an error flag (A3006), and prepares a target error notification command (A3007). Thereafter, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A3008), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (A3009).

  When the value of the target switch control area matches the current switch state (the result of A3009 is “Y”), that is, when the switch state has not been changed, Is updated by one (A3012), and it is determined whether the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (A3013). If the value of the target switch control area does not match the current switch state (the result of A3009 is “N”), that is, if the switch state has changed, the current switch state is displayed in the target switch control area. Save (A3010), and clear the target error monitoring timer (A3011), update the target error monitoring timer by 1 (A3012), and whether the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value Is determined (A3013).

  When the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (the result of A3013 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the error check process. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (the result of A3013 is “Y”), the error monitoring timer is updated by −1 and is kept at the value of the comparison value−1 (A3014). The prepared error flag is compared with the value of the target error flag area (A3015).

  When the prepared error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (the result of A3015 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends the error check process. If the set error flag does not match the value of the target error flag area (the result of A3015 is “N”), the prepared error flag is saved in the target error flag area (A3016), and command setting processing is performed. (A3017) and the error check process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (A1608) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special game process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In the special figure game process, input signal monitoring by the first start opening switch 601 and the second start opening switch 602, control of the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and setting of display of the special figure (identification symbol, identification information) are set. Do. The game control device 600 that executes special figure game processing constitutes special figure control means.

  When the special figure game process is started, the game control device 600 first executes a start switch monitoring process for monitoring winnings of the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602 (A3101).

  In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins at the first start winning port 37 and the second start winning port 38, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special variable display game based on the win Prior to the start of the game, a game result pre-determination is made to pre-determine a game result based on a prize. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 600 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A3102). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls won by the upper count switch 606 provided in the second special variable winning device 42 and the lower count switches 605a to 605m provided in the first special variable winning device 41 are detected. The number of winning game balls is monitored.

  Next, the game control device 600 updates the special game process timer by -1 if the special game process timer has not already expired (A3103). Then, it is checked whether or not the special figure game processing timer has expired (A3104). Note that the special figure game process timer is set with an initial value of the variation time of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed, and the value of the special figure game process timer is decremented by 1 in the process of A3104. When the value of the special figure game processing timer becomes 0, it is determined that the time is up. Note that the variation time may be measured by updating the variation control timer only when the variation display game is executed.

  When the special game process timer has not expired (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the processes after A3116.

  On the other hand, when the special game process timer expires (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the game control device 600 refers to the special game sequence to be branched to the process corresponding to the special game process number. The branch table is set in the register (A3105). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired based on the table (A3106). Then, the return address after the branch process is completed is saved in the stack area (A3107), and the process is branched according to the game process number (A3108). The game process number indicates the progress state of the special figure variation display game, and indicates the progress state of the special figure variation display game in seven stages of 0 to 6. When the process corresponding to a certain game process number is completed, the game process number is changed to the next number or the like.

  When the game process number is “0” (the result of A3108 is “0”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a special figure routine process (A3109). The special chart routine process monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effects, sets the information necessary to execute the special figure fluctuation processing, etc. Do. Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” (the result of A3108 is “1”), the game control device 600 executes the special figure changing process (A3110). In the special figure changing process, the stop display time of the identification information in the special figure changing display game, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, and the like are performed. Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “2” (the result of A3108 is “2”), the game control apparatus 600 executes the special figure display process (A3111). In the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit, the fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, Information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set. Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” (the result of A3108 is “3”), the game control device 600 executes the fanfare / interval process (A3112). In the fanfare / interval processing, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the game process number is “4” (the result of A3108 is “4”), the game control device 600 executes a process for opening the big prize opening (A3113). The processing during opening of the big prize opening is necessary to set an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the command of the big hit end screen if the big round is the final round, or to perform the big prize opening remaining ball processing Set information. Details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” (the result of A3108 is “5”), the game control device 600 executes the big winning opening remaining ball process (A3114). In the winning ball remaining ball processing, when the big hit round is the final round, the time for the remaining ball in the big winning mouth to be discharged is set, or the information necessary to perform the big hit end processing is set Or Details of the winning prize remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the winning prize remaining ball process, information necessary for updating the special symbol process timer and performing the fanfare / interval process or the big hit end process is set. In addition, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or whether a predetermined number (predetermined number) of game balls have been won in the big prize opening, and the opening / closing door 41a corresponding to the case where any of the conditions is satisfied. Close. After this is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, the special figure game process number is set to 6.

  When the game process number is “6” (the result of A3108 is “6”), the game control apparatus 600 executes a jackpot end process (A3115). In the jackpot end process, information necessary for performing the special figure routine process of A3109 is set. Details of the big hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the variation of symbols in the collective display device 50 (special figure 1 display 51) (A3116). Subsequently, a symbol variation control process related to the collective display device 50 (special display 1 display 51) is executed (A3117).

  Further, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the variation of symbols in the collective display device 50 (special figure 2 display 52) (A3118). Subsequently, the symbol variation control process related to the collective display device 50 (special figure 2 display 52) is executed (A3119).

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (A3101) in the above-described special figure game process (FIG. 31) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of start port switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  When the start port switch monitoring process is started, the game control device 600 first prepares a table for setting information on hold due to a game ball winning in the first start winning port 37 (A3201).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a special-purpose start port switch common process that is executed in common when a game ball has won the first start winning port 37 or the second starting winning port 38 (A3202). Details of the special figure start port switch common process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the game control device 600, the ordinary electric accessory (general power, ordinary variation winning device, movable member 38a of the second starting winning port 38) is operating, that is, the movable member of the second starting winning port 38. It is determined whether or not 38a is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A3203). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A3203 is “Y”), the processing after A3205 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A3203 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not a general electric power illegal prize has occurred (A3204).

  More specifically, the second power prize winning opening 38 cannot receive a game ball when the movable member 38a is closed, and can receive a game ball only when the movable member 38a is open. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, there is a high possibility that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and when there is a game ball won in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. In the process of A3204, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value, for example, 5).

  The game control device 600, when a general electric power illegal winning has occurred (the result of A3204 is "Y"), the processing related to the special figure variable display game as winning and invalidity of the game ball to the second start winning opening 38 Is not executed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 600 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening 38 when the general electric power illegal winning has not occurred (the result of A3204 is “N”) (A3205). Then, the special figure start port switch common process is executed (A3206). Thereafter, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start-port switch common processing (A3202, A3206) in the above-described start-port switch monitoring processing (FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The special chart start port switch common processing is when a signal is input from the first start port switch 601 or the second start port switch 602 because the game ball has won the first start winning port 37 or the second start winning port 38. This process is executed in common.

  First, the game control device 600 checks whether a signal is input from a monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 601) of the first start port switch 601 and the second start port switch 602. (A3301). If no signal is input from the start port switch to be monitored (the result of A3301 is “N”), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when a signal is input from the monitoring target start port switch (result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 600 has latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the monitoring target start port. It is determined whether or not a random number has been extracted (A3302). If the random number has not been extracted (the result of A3302 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  When there is latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the monitored start port (the result of A3302 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the start port winning flag corresponding to the monitored start port switch to RWM. (A3303). Furthermore, the big hit random number extracted to the hard random number latch register corresponding to the monitoring target start switch is loaded and prepared for use in the subsequent processing (A3304).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 outputs the number of times information related to the number of times of winning in the start winning port corresponding to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 1 (start port signal output). Load) (A3305). Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the loaded value (A3306), and it is checked whether or not the start port signal output count overflows (A3307).

  If the start port signal output count does not overflow (the result of A3307 is “N”), the game control device 600 sets the updated start port signal output count value in the RWM start port signal output count area. Save (A3308).

  After the processing of A3308 is completed or when the number of times of start port signal output overflows (the result of A3307 is “Y”), the game control device 600 updates the characteristics of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored. It is determined whether or not the figure holding (starting memory) number is less than the upper limit value (A3309).

  When the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3309 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets information corresponding to the winning detected by the start port switch. Specifically, first, 1 is added to the number of special figure reservations to be updated (for example, the number of special figure 1 reservations) (A3310).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a decoration special figure holding number command corresponding to the monitoring target start port switch and the special figure holding number (A3311). The decoration special figure reservation number command is composed of a MODE part and an ACTION part. At this time, the prefetch result corresponding to the newly generated start memory may be transmitted together with the decoration special figure hold number command. For example, a value indicating the prefetching result may be added to the ACTION part of the decoration special figure reservation number command.

  More specifically, the game control device 600 first prepares a decoration special figure hold number command (MODE) for the start port switch to be monitored, and further displays a decoration special figure hold number command ( ACTION) is prepared. Then, command setting processing for setting the prepared special figure reservation number command is executed (A3312).

  Next, the game control device 600 calculates the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated special figure hold number (A3313). Then, the big hit random number acquired in the process of A3304 is saved in the big hit random number save area of the RWM (A3314). Further, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A3315). Thereafter, the prepared jackpot symbol random number is saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number saving area (A3316).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 extracts a variation pattern random number, and saves the extracted value in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A3317). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage areas. The variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are used, for example, for individually setting the variation patterns of the first half and the second half, or for executing a specific effect.

  Fluctuation pattern random numbers (variation patterns 1 to 3) for determining a variation pattern in the first or second special figure variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in variation display without various reach and reach), Unlike the big hit symbol random number which is updated by the software of the random number generation circuit, it is updated by the game control program. Note that the update of the variation pattern random number is not limited to being performed by the game control program, but may be performed by hardware or software of the random number generation circuit.

  Then, the game control device 600 loads a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the monitored start port switch saved in the RWM in the process of A3316, and executes a special figure holding information determination process (A3318). Details of the special figure hold information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (the result of A3309 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) (A3319) and sets the command. The process is executed (A3320). Then, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  When the effect control device 700 receives the special figure reservation number command and the special figure reservation number command (holding overflow command) transmitted in this process in the first scene control process (FIG. 82) described later, the operation of the operation unit 15 is performed. Execute the production combined with.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A3318) in the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information (game result information) corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on each start memory.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the execution condition of the prefetching effect (notice) is satisfied (A3401). Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied is a case where the input of the start port switch according to step A3301 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the second start port switch 602. . Further, when the input of the start port switch according to step A3301 of the special figure start port switch common processing is the input of the first start port switch 601, the opening extension function of the normal variable winning device 38 is not in operation, that is, This is a case where it is not in the short-time gaming state, and a case where it is not in the big hit (special gaming state). In the case of the normal gaming state, it is also determined that the condition for transmitting the prefetch prohibition command, that is, the condition for executing the prefetch effect is not satisfied even when the number of executions of the variable display game is less than 8 after the power failure is restored Also good. If the execution condition for the prefetch effect is not satisfied (the result of A3401 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the special figure hold information determination process.

  In addition, when the result of the normal map display game is a win in the normal gaming state (non-electric support state), the public member short opening that the movable member 38a opens for a short time with a probability of 4/5, or 1 / In the specification in which the normal power long open, in which the movable member 38a is opened for a long time (0.5 + 5 seconds) with a 5-probability, is selected, the pre-reading is not performed for the start-up memory in FIG. Pre-reading may be performed for the start-up memory of the special figure 2 that was won when the public electric long opening occurred.

  On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the newly stored start memory is a big hit when the execution condition of the prefetch effect is satisfied (the result of A3401 is “Y”). Is executed (A3402). The big hit determination process determines whether or not the result of the variable display game related to the start memory is a big hit by determining whether or not the big hit random number value included in the pending start memory matches the big hit determination value. judge.

  The game control device 600 determines whether or not the determination result by the big hit determination process of A3402 is a big hit (A3403). When the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (the result of A3403 is “N”), the stoppage stop symbol pattern is set as the stop symbol pattern (A3406). And the process after A3407 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (the result of A3403 is “Y”), the game control device 600 specifies the identification symbol at the time of the big hit in the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the winning opening. This is set as a table for this purpose (A3404). In the jackpot symbol random number check table, a determination value of a random number indicating a distribution rate of whether or not the jackpot is hit and a jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to the determination value are defined.

  Further, the game control device 600 checks the big hit symbol random number from the big hit symbol random number check table set in the process of A3404, and acquires and sets a corresponding big hit stop symbol pattern (A3405).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 saves the jackpot stop symbol pattern set in the process of A3405 or the loss stop symbol pattern set in the process of A3406 in the prefetch stop symbol stop pattern area (A3407). Further, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (A3408), and command setting processing is executed (A3409).

  Next, the game control device 600 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information set with respect to the start target to be monitored (A3410). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a second-half variation pattern setting information table corresponding to the start target to be monitored in order to set a second-half variation pattern among the variation modes in the special figure variation display game (A3411), A variation pattern setting process for setting the entire variation pattern is executed (A3412). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that a variation pattern setting process may be defined for each result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a corresponding fluctuation pattern setting process may be executed according to the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game.

  Finally, the game control device 600 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first-half variation number and the second-half variation number set in the variation pattern setting process (A3413), and executes the command setting process (A3414). Thereafter, the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

  As described above, in the special figure hold information determination process, before executing the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is acquired and notified to the effect control device 700. Is possible. The effect control device 700 changes the display mode of the start-up memory display displayed on the variation display device 35, for example, and gives the player the result of the special diagram variation display game before the start timing of the special diagram variation display game. Is notified. Here, the game control device 600 functions as a prior determination unit, and the effect control device 700 functions as a prior notification unit.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process (A3402) in the special figure hold information determination process (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for jackpot determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the special figure game process.

  First, the game control device 600 sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3501), and determines whether the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3502). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3502 is “Y”), that is, the game control device 600 sets the difference as the determination result (A3507), and performs the big hit determination processing. finish. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3502 is “N”), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (A3503).

  Then, when the gaming control device 600 is in a high probability state (the result of A3503 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value during the high probability is set (A3504), and the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (A3506). If the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3503 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A3505), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3506). ).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3506 is “Y”), that is, the game control device 600 sets the difference as the determination result (A3507), and ends the big hit determination process. To do. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3506 is “N”), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (A3508), and the big hit determination processing ends.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A3102) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 determines whether the big winning opening (the first special variation winning device 41 or the second special variation winning device 42) is open, that is, in the special gaming state (A3601). If the big prize opening is not open (the result of A3601 is “N”), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the big prize opening is open (the result of A3601 is “Y”), the prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the big prize opening added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process is 0. Is set (A3602), and it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether the first special variable winning device 41 is being opened (A3603).

  When the lower major winning opening is open (the result of A3603 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round (A3604). ). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3604 is “Y”), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A 3604 is “N”), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower winning port switch 1 (one lower count switch 605) (A 3605).

  When there is no input to the lower prize winning switch 1 (the result of A3605 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether there is an input to the lower prize winning switch 2 (the other lower count switch 605). (A3609). When there is an input to the lower prize winning switch 1 (result of A3605 is “Y”), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3606), and the lower prize winning count command is prepared (A3607). Then, command setting processing (A3608) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 605) (A3609).

  When there is no input to the lower prize winning port switch 2 (the result of A3609 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3618). Further, when there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3610), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (A3611). Then, command setting processing (A3612) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3618).

  On the other hand, in the game control apparatus 600, when the lower major prize opening is not open (the result of A3603 is “N”), that is, the upper major prize opening (second special variable prize winning apparatus 42) is being opened (second special prize). In the special game state in which the variable winning device 42 is opened), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (upper count switch 606) (A3613). When there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (the result of A3613 is “N”), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the upper prize winning opening switch (the result of A3613 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (A3614).

  When the winning prize remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3614 is “N”), the game control device 600 updates the winning counter by +1 (A3615), and prepares an upper winning prize count command (A3616). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A 3614 is “Y”), an upper winning port count command is prepared (A 3616). Thereafter, command setting processing (A3617) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3618). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

  In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3618), when the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3618 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. To do. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3618 is “N”), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of winning prizes (A3619), and the number of winning prizes is the upper limit (one round). (A3620).

  When the number of the big prize mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3620 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the big prize mouth switch monitoring process. Also, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3620 is “Y”), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (A3621), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3622). Then, a pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (A3623), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (A3624), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (A3117, A3119) in the above-described special figure game process (FIG. 31) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the symbol variation control process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols.

  First, it is checked whether the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure (A3701). If the special figure changing flag is changing (the result of A3702 is “Y”), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired. (A3703), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (A3704), and the value of the timer is It is determined whether 0, that is, the time is up (A3705).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of A3705 is “Y”), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (A3708). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (A3706), and the first special figure and the second Among the special drawings, the variable symbol number related to the special symbol to be controlled (for example, the first special graph) is updated by +1 (A3707), and display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (A3708). ). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A3711), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (the result of A3702 is “Y”), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired ( A3709). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (A3710), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A3711), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. It becomes.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (A3109) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure routine processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3801). Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3801 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) is 0 (A3806). Thus, by performing the special figure 2 hold number check (A3801) before the special figure 1 hold number check (A3806), the second advantageous to the player over the first special figure variable display game. The special figure variation display game is preferentially executed.

  When the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3801 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (A3802), and sets the command Is executed (A3803). Further, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3804). Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 600 executes a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) for preparing a table (for the second special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (A3805). Normal processing ends. Details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3806 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (A3807), A setting process is executed (A3808). Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3809). Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control apparatus 700 only when the hold number changes.

  After that, the game control device 600 executes a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) for preparing a table (for the first special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (A3810). Normal processing ends. Details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the game control device 600 has already started the customer waiting demo in which the variable display device 35 displays the customer waiting demo screen. It is determined whether or not there is (A3811). If the customer waiting demonstration is not started, that is, not started (the result of A3811 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the touch switch 120 is detected (A3812). If the touch switch 120 is not detected (result of A3812 is “N”), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to ON and saved (A3813). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared as customer waiting demo start information that enables control to shift the gaming machine 1 to the customer waiting demo state (A3814), and a command setting process is executed to execute the customer waiting demo command. Transmit (A3815). Note that the gaming microcomputer 611 that performs such special figure routine processing and the output unit 630 that outputs a command constitute a customer waiting demo information transmitting means capable of transmitting customer waiting demo start information.

  As described above, the special condition fluctuation display game is not being executed, the number of holds is 0, and the touch switch 120 is not detected is a condition for shifting to the customer waiting state (customer waiting demo state). When this transition condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied, a customer waiting demonstration in the variable display device 35 is started by the transition process (A3813-A3815). Note that when the special figure routine processing is performed, the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed.

  On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the game control device 600 has already set the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area, Has already been transmitted to the effect control device 700, and therefore the processing after A3816 is executed. If the touch switch 120 is detected (the result of A3812 is “Y”), the processing after A3816 is executed.

  Finally, the game control device 600 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 for preparing a table for shifting to the special figure normal process (A3816). Specifically, a process of setting a processing number “0” corresponding to the special figure routine processing, a flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) for defining a big prize opening fraud monitoring period, and the like in the table is executed. Thereafter, the special figure routine processing is terminated.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (A3816) in the special figure normal process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 sets “0” related to the special figure routine process as the process number (A3901), saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3902), and clears the variation symbol discrimination flag area. (A3903). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A3904), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A3905), The process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3809) in the special figure usual process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 600 first saves a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A4001), and the first special figure fluctuation display game. A big hit flag 1 setting process (A4002) for setting shift information and big hit information is performed on the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the big hit is.

  Next, the game control device 600 performs the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A4003) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), and then the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern. The special figure information setting process (A4004) for setting the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the variation pattern setting of the first special figure variation display game is set. A table is prepared (A4005). After that, a variation pattern setting process (A4006) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process (A4006) for setting information of variation start of the first special figure variation display game ( A4007) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A4002) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 40) described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure of jackpot flag 1 setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 saves the shift information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4101). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4102). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (A4103) is performed for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A4103) is a big hit (the result of A4104 is “Y”), the game control device 600 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 1 in which the loss information is saved in A4101. And save (A4105), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A4103) is not a big hit (the result of A4104 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A4003) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 40) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4201). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4201 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) The big hit symbol random number is loaded from (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4203), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4204). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 sets a jackpot stop symbol information table (A4205), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (A4207). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the game control device 600 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the round number upper limit information area (A4208), and acquires the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number. Is saved in the special winning opening release information area (A4209). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4212).

  On the other hand, when the game control device 600 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4210), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped as a stop symbol. The pattern is saved in the pattern area (A4211), and a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4212). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  After that, the game control device 600 saves the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (A4213), and performs a command setting process (A4214). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 700 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4215), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4216). The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (A4004) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 40) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the special drawing time is short (short time state) (A4301). When the special drawing time is not short (the result of A4301 is “N”), a normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (A4302). If the special drawing time is short (the result of A4301 is “Y”), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (A4303).

  Then, the game control device 600 loads the special figure holding number corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag (A4304), acquires the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure holding number, and saves it in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. (A4305). Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, the game control device 600 sets a distribution base pointer table (A4306), and acquires a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4307). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (A4308), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (A4309), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the production mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (A4006) in the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 40) described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  First, the game control device 600 sets a variation group selection address table (A4401), and acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 (A4402). Then, it is determined whether the production mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (A4403). When the production mode number is not less than 2 (the result of A4403 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is an off-stop symbol pattern (A4404). If the stop symbol pattern is not an off-stop symbol pattern (A4404 When the result is “N”), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4407).

  On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (the result of A4403 is “Y”), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (the result of A4404 is “Y”), the game control device 600 The address of the table corresponding to the variable distribution information 1 is acquired from the table prepared in A4402 (A4405). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the second-half fluctuation group (A4406), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4407).

  When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the game control device 600 also includes the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. By taking the address into consideration, the selection pattern of the variation pattern is made different depending on the starting memory number.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4408), acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4409), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area Fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4410). Then, a sorting process (A4411) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4412). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control device 600 sets the first half variation group table (A4413), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (A4414). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4415), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4416). Thereafter, a sorting process (A4417) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (A4418), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (A4408) in the above-described variation pattern setting process (FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of 2-byte distribution processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  First, the game control device 600 checks whether or not the top data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is an unallocated code (ie, “0”) (A4501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  When the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the game control device 600 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4507). ) The 2-byte sorting process ends. On the other hand, when the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (result of A4502 is “N”), one distribution value first defined in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control device 600 calculates a new random value by subtracting the distribution value acquired in A4503 from the random value loaded in A4407 (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) (A4504). It is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the processing shifts to A4503, and the subsequent processing I do. That is, in A4503, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted by using the determined random value as a new random value in A4505, and a new random value is further obtained. Calculate (A4504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4505).

  The above processing is executed at A4505 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in A4505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (A4507), and 2 bytes are distributed. End the process.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the sorting process (A4411, A4417) in the above-described variation pattern setting process (FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of distribution processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  First, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the leading data of the prepared second half variation selection table (selection table) or first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). Check (A4601). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  When the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (the result of A4602 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Update (A4607), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without sorting (the result of A4602 is “N”), the first specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is one. The distribution value is acquired (A4603).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 600 subtracts the distribution value acquired in A4603 from the random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in A4410 or A4416, and obtains a new random value. After the calculation (A4604), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4605). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4605 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4606), the process proceeds to A4603 and thereafter Perform the process.

  That is, the game control device 600 obtains the next specified distribution value in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table in A4603, and then distributes the determined random number value in A4605 as a new random value. The value is subtracted and a new random value is calculated (A4604). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4605). The above process is executed at A4605 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4605 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in A4605 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4605 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4607), and the distribution process is performed. finish.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting process (A4007) in the special figure 1 change start process (FIG. 40) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of change start information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4701). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4702), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4703). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (A4704), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (A4705).

  Then, the game control device 600 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A4706), and saves the addition value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4707). Thereafter, a fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is prepared (A4708), a fluctuation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is prepared (A4709), and command setting processing is performed (A4710). Next, the special symbol holding number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (A4711), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (A4712), and the random number storage region is shifted ( A4713), the vacant area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A4714).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 first clears the stop extension information area as processing related to extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game (A4715). Then, the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (the result of A4716 is “Y”), the effect mode number is 2 (the result of A4717 is “Y”), and the remaining number of rotations in the effect mode (number of games) ) Is 1 (the result of A4718 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (A4719).

  When the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A4719 is “N”), the game control device 600 saves the stop extension information 1 in the stop extension information area (A4720), and issues a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information. Preparation (A4722) is performed, command setting processing (A4723) is performed, and variation start information setting processing is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). Further, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A4719 is “Y”), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (A4721), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared. (A4722), command setting processing (A4723) is performed, and variation start information setting processing is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (result of A4716 is “N”) or when the effect mode number is not 2 (result of A4717 is “N”), the remaining number of revolutions in effect mode 2 (game When the number is not 1 (the result of A4718 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the variation start information setting process. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 600 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 600). Further, the game control device 600 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 700 later, and the effect control device 700 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to the extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 700 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 700 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3804) in the special figure usual process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  The game control device 600 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A4801), and the second special figure fluctuation display game. A big hit flag 2 setting process (A4802) for setting deviation information and big hit information is performed on the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the big hit is.

  Next, the game control device 600 performs the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A4803) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), and then the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern. Special table information setting process (A4804, see FIG. 43) is set, and special figure 2 is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. A variation pattern setting information table is prepared (A4805). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (A4806, see FIG. 44) for setting a fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game ( A4807, see FIG. 47), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A4802) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 48) described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 38 is performed on the second start-up memory.

  The game control device 600 first saves the shift information in the big hit flag 2 area (A4901). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4902). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (A4903, see FIG. 36) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A4903) is a big hit (the result of A4904 is “Y”), the game control device 600 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 2 in which the lost information is saved in A4901. And save (A4905), and the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A4903) is not a big hit (the result of A4904 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A4803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In this process, the same process as the process in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 42 is performed on the second start memory.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5001). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A5001 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) The big hit symbol random number is loaded from (A5002). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A5003), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A5004). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a big hit stop symbol information table is set (A5005), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A5006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (A5007). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A5008), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening information is obtained. Save in the area (A5009). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A5012).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (the result of A5001 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A5010), and the error stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (A5011), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A5012). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A5013), and a command setting process (A5014) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 700 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A5015), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A5016). The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 600 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 37, and the second start winning opening 38 (normal variation winning device). Fluctuation display game execution means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball is provided. In addition, the game control device 600 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 600).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (A3810) in the special figure usual process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special-fluctuation changing process transition setting processing (special drawing 1) according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 600 first sets “1” as the process number (A5101), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5102). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5103), and a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5104). When the touch switch 120 is detected, the customer waiting demo flag area is already cleared (A1904). However, even when the store clerk puts the game ball directly into the first start winning opening 37 and starts the special figure variation display game, the customer waiting demo flag is cleared so that the customer waiting state can be recovered. deep.

  After that, the game control device 600 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5105), and the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. ) Is set (for example, 200 ms) (A5106), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (A3805) in the special figure usual process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special-fluctuation changing process transition setting processing (special drawing 2) according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first sets “1” as the process number (A5201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5202). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5203), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204). When the touch switch 120 is detected, the customer waiting demo flag area is already cleared (A1904). However, even when the store clerk puts the game ball directly into the second start winning opening 38 to start the special figure variation display game, the customer waiting demo flag is cleared so that the customer waiting state can be recovered. deep.

  After that, the game control device 600 saves the changing flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A5205), and the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. ) Is set (for example, 200 ms) (A5206), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A3110) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure changing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (A5301). When there is no stop extension information (the result of A5301 is “N”), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5302). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (A5306), and the special figure display process is terminated.

  In addition, when there is stop extension information (the result of A5301 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 determines whether or not it is stop extension information 1 (A5303). If it is the stop extension information 1 (the result of A5303 is “Y”), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5304). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (A5306), and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the game control device 600 is not the stop extension information 1 (the result of A5303 is “N”), that is, if it is the stop extension information 2, the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is shown in the special figure game processing. Save to the timer area (A5305). Then, the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (A5306), and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 600 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (A5306) in the special figure fluctuation mid-process described above (FIG. 53) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display process transition setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 600 first sets a process number “2” corresponding to the special figure display process (A5401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5402).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the signals related to the end of the fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2 in the test signal output data area (A5403, A5404), and executes the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. The control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area corresponding to the number of times (A5405).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 display 51 for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game. (A5406). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A5407). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A3111) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first loads the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A5501), and clears the RWM big hit flag 2 area (A5502). Do. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5503). If the big hit flag 2 is determined to be a big hit (the result of A5503 is “Y”), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5508), and the second A test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5509), and the round number upper limit value table is set (A5510).

  On the other hand, in A5503, if the game control device 600 determines that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5503 is "N") as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process The big hit flag 1 is loaded (A5504), and the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5505). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A5506). If the big hit flag 1 is determined to be a big hit (the result of A5506 is "Y"), the big hit of the first special figure variation display game (the special figure 1 big hit) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5507), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (A5510) is performed.

  After performing the process (A5510) of setting the round number upper limit table, the game control apparatus 600 acquires the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information and saves it in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A5511). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5512).

  Next, the game control device 600 loads and prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (A5513), and performs a command setting process (A5514). After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (A5515), and a command setting process (A5516). )I do. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (A5517), and the command setting process (A5518) is performed. Do.

  Next, the game control device 600 saves in the external information output data area of the RWM the prize winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game. (A5519). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5520). Then, the winning prize opening incorrect information area of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening information (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 41 or the second special variable winning prize apparatus 42) is cleared (A5521), and the special prize opening information is obtained. The off-monitoring period non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to (A5522).

  Next, the game control device 600 loads the special figure game mode flag (A5523), and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag saving area (A5524). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on information stored later. Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (A5525) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A5506 is “N”), the game control device 600 performs the production mode information check processing (A5526) regarding the setting of the production mode, and displays the special figure variation display that makes the time reduced state. Time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (A5527) for managing the number of times the game is executed is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (A5528, see FIG. 39) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (A5525) in the special figure display process (FIG. 55) described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A5601), and saves the process number in the special-purpose game process number area (A5602).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) in the external information output data area (A5603), and saves a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state in the test signal output data area. (A5604). Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (A5605), the number with low probability is saved in the game state display number area (A5606), and the normal game mode flag area Saves the low probability of ordinary maps & no ordinary power support flag (A5607).

  Then, the game control device 600 clears the variation symbol determination flag area (A5608), and turns off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state. Is cleared (A5609), and the special figure low probability & short timeless flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5610). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 700 at the time of power failure recovery (A5611), and the special figure variable display game that can be executed in a short time state The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of times is cleared (A5612). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (A5613), and clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5614). Then, the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (A5615), the command of the rendering mode 1 is saved in the rendering mode command area (A5616), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is finished. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5526) in the above-described special figure display process (FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the effect mode information check process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5701). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5701 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  In addition, when the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of A5701 is “N”), the game control device 600 performs the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode Is updated by -1 (A5702), and it is determined whether the remaining number of rotations of the effect is 0 (A5703). When the remaining effect rotation speed becomes 0 (the result of A5703 is “Y”), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5704), and the next The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (A5705).

  Then, the game control device 600 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred and saves it in the effect mode number area (A5706), acquires the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and enters the effect remaining speed area. Save (A5707), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and save it in the next mode transition information area (A5708). Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (A5709), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (A5710), a command setting process (A5711) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A5703 is “N”), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 600 has the remaining effect rotation speed. It is determined whether the rotation speed is a specified speed (for example, 8 times) (A5712). When the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (the result of A5712 is “N”), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (the result of A5712 is “Y”), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (A5713), a command setting process (A5714) is performed, and an effect mode information check process is performed. Exit. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 600 in this way, for example, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (A5527) in the above-described special chart display process (FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the time shortening variation number update process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (A5801). If the special figure is highly probable (the result of A5801 is “Y”), the time shortening variation number update process is terminated. If the special figure high probability is not in effect (the result of A5801 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure is in short time (short time state) (A5802).

  When it is not during the special time (the result of A5802 is “N”), the game control apparatus 600 ends the time-reduced variation frequency update process. In addition, when the special figure time is short (the result of A5802 is “Y”), the time reduction fluctuation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the short time state is updated by −1 (A5803) to shorten the time. It is determined whether the number of changes has become 0 (A5804). When the time shortening variation number is not 0 (the result of A5804 is “N”), that is, when the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. When the time shortening variation count is 0 (the result of A5804 is “Y”), that is, when the time-short state ends in the current special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (A5805). ), Command setting processing (A5806) is performed. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is performed (A5807), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (A5807) in the above-described time shortening fluctuation number update process (FIG. 58) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control apparatus 600 saves a signal related to the end of time reduction in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves a signal related to the end of time reduction in the test signal output data area (A5902).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5903), and saves the ordinary low probability & no power support flag in the usual game mode flag area (A5904). . Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5905), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5906). The transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (A3112) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the first half of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the latter half of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 updates the number of rounds in the special game state by +1 (A6001), and determines whether the special winning opening information is the upper special winning opening (second special variable winning device 42) opening / closing patterns 1 to 3. Determine (A6002). When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (the result of A6002 is “Y”), the control pointer (S (start value), E (end value)) is set (A6009), and the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table. In the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted. If the winning opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 1 to 3 (the result of A6002 is “N”), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (A6003), A setting process (A6004) is performed.

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 determines whether the starting round is the first round (1R) (A6005). If it is the first round (the result of A6005 is “Y”), the big prize opening information is It is determined whether or not the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 41) is an open / close pattern (A6006). When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A6006 is “Y”), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern is set. (A6010), the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the lower big opening opening / closing pattern (the result of A6006 is “N”), it is determined whether the big winning opening opening information is the upper big opening opening / closing pattern 4 (A6007).

  When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 (the result of A6007 is “Y”), the game control device 600 performs the control corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4. The pointer (S, E) is set (A6008), and the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG. Also, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (the result of A6007 is “N”), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 ) Is set (A6011), and the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the starting round is not the first round (1R) (result of A6005 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether the starting round is 2 to 11 rounds (A6012), When the rounds to be started are 2 to 11 rounds (the result of A6012 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a top prize opening opening / closing pattern (A6013). Then, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A6013 is “N”), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second to eleventh rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern are set. (A6014), the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A6013 is “Y”), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning prize opening / closing pattern are set. (A6015), the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG.

  When the starting round is not 2 to 11 rounds (the result of A6012 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (A6016). ). Then, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (the result of A6016 is “Y”), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set. (A6015), the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (the result of A6016 is "N"), it is determined whether the big winning opening opening information is the lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 (A6017).

  When the winning prize opening information is the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (the result of A6017 is “Y”), the game control device 600 controls the control pointers corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 ( S, E) is set (A6018), and the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (the result of A6017 is “N”), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 3 are set. The setting is made (A6019), and the process proceeds to A6020 in FIG.

  In A6020 of FIG. 61, the game control apparatus 600 saves the start value (S) of the set control pointer in the big hit control pointer area (A6020), and sets the end value (E) of the set control pointer to the big hit control pointer. Save in the upper limit area (A6021). Then, a solenoid information setting process (A6022) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening information is a lower big winning opening / closing pattern (A6023).

  When the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A6023 is "Y"), the game control device 600 performs the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 (A6024), and the fanfare / Terminates processing during the interval. Also, when the big prize opening information is not the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A6023 is “N”), the game control device 600 performs the process for setting the big prize opening opening process transition processing 2 (A6025), and the fanfare. / End the processing during the interval.

[Solenoid information setting process]
Next, details of the solenoid information setting process (A6022) in the above-described fanfare / interval process (FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of solenoid information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first sets a big winning opening control address table (A5901), and acquires the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit midway control pointer (A5902). Thereafter, the output data is acquired, saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5903), the opening / closing time value is acquired and saved in the special game process timer area (A5904), and the solenoid information setting process is terminated. With this process, the opening and closing of the special winning opening and its time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process (FIG. 60, FIG. 61) 1 (A6024) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing a procedure of the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening opening process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets the process number to “4” related to the process for opening the big prize opening (A6301), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A6302). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (A6303), and information in the big winning prize count number area storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (A6304). Then, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (A6305), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process transition setting process 2 (A6025) in the above-described fanfare / interval process (FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the big prize opening opening according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets the process number to “4” related to the special winning opening opening process (A6401), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A6402). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the top prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (A6403), and the information in the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (A6404). Then, the top winning mouth opening control flag is saved in the big winning mouth determination flag area (A6405), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (A3113) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special winning opening opening process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 updates the big hit control pointer by +1 (A6501), and determines whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit area (A6502).

  When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (the result of A6502 is “N”), the game control device 600 performs a solenoid information setting process (A6509, see FIG. 62). Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed (A6510), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended.

  When the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (the result of A6502 is “Y”), the game control device 600 indicates that the big winning opening release information is the upper big winning opening short opening pattern (upper winning prize) It is determined whether the mouth opening patterns 1 to 3) (A6503). When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening short opening pattern (the result of A6503 is “Y”), the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (A6508) is performed, and the process of opening the winning prize opening is ended. To do. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and an interval command and an ending command are not transmitted.

  In addition, when the big prize opening information is not the upper prize winning short opening pattern (the result of A6503 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines the current round number and the RWM round number in the special gaming state being executed. The round number upper limit value in the upper limit value area is compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (A6504). If it is not the final round (the result of A6504 is “N”), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (A6505), command setting processing (A6507) is performed, and the winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing is performed. (A6508) is performed, and the process for opening the special winning opening is completed. In the case of the final round (the result of A6504 is “Y”), an ending command related to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (A6506), and the command setting process (A6507) Is performed, a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (A6508) is performed, and the winning prize opening opening process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (A6508) in the aforementioned special winning opening open process (FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first sets the process number to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball process (A6601), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6602). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6603). Then, in order to close the open / close door 41a of the first special variable winning device 41 or the movable member 42a of the second special variable winning device 42, off data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 28a or 28b is used as the large winning port solenoid. The data is saved in the output data area (A6604), and the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 3]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process transition setting process 3 (A6510) in the aforementioned special winning opening open process (FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the process for setting the process for setting a special prize opening opening process 3 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 sets the process number to “4” for the process for opening the big prize opening (A6701), saves the process number in the special game process number area (A6702), and performs the process for opening the big prize opening. The migration setting process 3 ends.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (A3114) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 600 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A6801).

  When the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (the result of A6801 is “N”), the game control device 600 sets the interval time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening information to the special game. Save to the processing timer area (A6802), perform the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (A6803), and finish the winning prize remaining ball process. The interval time is set to a time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

  When the current round in the special game state is the final round (the result of A6801 is “Y”), the game control device 600 stores the special-purpose game mode flag save area for storing the effect mode when the special result is derived. The game mode flag is loaded from (A6804). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (A6805), and the big hit ending process transition setting process (A6806) is performed to perform the special winning prize remaining ball processing. finish.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the production mode other than the short-time state, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 22400 ms, including 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period. Further, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the time short state when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 1400 ms in combination with 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (A6803) in the aforementioned winning prize remaining ball process (FIG. 66) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of fanfare / interval process transition setting processing 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first sets “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A6901), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6902).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the end of opening of the lower grand prize opening (first special variable prize winning apparatus 41) in the test signal output data area (A6903), and the upper large prize opening (second special variable prize winning). A signal relating to the end of opening of the device 42) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6904). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (A6905), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (A6806) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process (FIG. 68) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end process transition setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets “6” as the process number related to the big hit end process (A7001), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7002). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of opening of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 41) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7003), and the opening end of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 42) is saved. The signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7004).

  Next, the game control device 600 clears the information of the number-of-wins count area that stores the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth (A7005), and clears the information of the number-of-rounds area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Then (A7006), the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (A7007). Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (A7008), and the information for the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. Is cleared (A7009), and the information in the control jack area during the big hit for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (A7010). Thereafter, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (A7011), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (A7012), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (A3115) in the special figure game process (FIG. 31) described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 is set when the probability variation determination flag that is set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special gaming state this time becomes a high probability state after the special gaming state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (A7101). If it is not high probability data (result of A7101 is “N”), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (A7102), and if it is high probability data (result of A7101 is “Y”), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed. (A7103), a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (A7104), and a command setting process (A7105) is performed.

  Next, the game control device 600 first sets an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 600 (A7106). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (A7107). Further, the remaining effect speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (A7108), and the next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Is saved in the next mode transition information area (A7109).

  Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (A7110), saves the command in the effect mode command area (A7111), and performs a command setting process (A7112). Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (A7113), and the jackpot end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A7102) in the jackpot end process (FIG. 71) described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end setting processing 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control apparatus 600 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A7201), and saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (A7202).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the general figure high probability & normal power support flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A7203), and saves the special figure low probability & short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area ( A7204). Thereafter, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A7205), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (A7206), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is finished.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A7103) in the jackpot end process (FIG. 71) described above will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end setting processing 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control apparatus 600 saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the external information output data area (A7301), and saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the test signal output data area (A7302).

  Next, the game control device 600 saves the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (A7303) and saves the special figure high probability & hourly flag in the special figure game mode flag area ( A7304). Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A7305), the time shortening variation frequency area is cleared (A7306), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

  That is, the specific game in which the game control device 600 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends the period during which the normal variation prize-winning device 38 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (A7113) in the jackpot end process (FIG. 71) described above will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 600 sets “0” as the process number related to the special figure routine process (A7401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7402). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (A7403), and a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (A7404). Subsequently, the information in the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (A7405), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (A7406), and the number in the game time display number area is saved. (A7407). Then, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower major prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7408), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A7409). The process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1611) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display part 54, the special figure 2 hold display part 55, the general figure hold display part 56, the first game state display part 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  First, the game control device 600 sets a general figure hold number table in which the display mode in the general figure hold display unit 56 is defined (A7501), acquires display data corresponding to the general figure hold number, and holds the general figure hold. The data is saved in the segment area of the display unit 56 (A7502). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode in the special figure 1 hold display section 54 is defined is set (A7503), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired to display the special figure 1 hold display. The data is saved in the segment area of the part 54 (A7504).

  After that, the game control device 600 sets a special figure 2 reservation number table in which the display mode in the special figure 2 reservation display unit 55 is defined (A7505), and acquires display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. Save in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display section 55 (A7506). Furthermore, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (A7507), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit 60 ( A7508).

  Next, the game control device 600 sets a game state display table in which display modes in the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined (A7509), and corresponds to the game state display number. Display data is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display section (A7510). After that, it is determined whether or not the high-probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high-probability state when the power failure is restored (A7511). If the high-probability notification flag is on (the result of A7511 is “Y”), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process ends. If the high probability notification flag is not on (the result of A7511 is “N”), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display unit 59 (A7512), and the segment LED editing is performed. End the process.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1612) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first turns on the magnetic sensor 23 (magnetic sensor switch) from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 23 and taken into the third input port 622a (input port 3). It is determined whether the detected state is detected (A7601). When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A7601 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by 1 (A7602), It is determined whether the timer has expired (A7603).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of A7603 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the game control device 600 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer (A7604). The initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A7605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (A7606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (A7607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region ( A7613). That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 23 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions).

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor 23 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (the result of A7601 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 600 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer ( A7608), if the magnet fraud notification timer defining the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A7609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A7610). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of A7603 is “N”), the process proceeds to A7609.

  When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7610 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 600 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7610 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the fraud notification period ends or from the beginning If fraud notification has not been performed, a command to end magnet fraud notification is prepared (A7611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (A7612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A7613 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 600 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A7613 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (A7614), command setting processing is performed (A7615), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. To do.

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1613) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of radio wave fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24, and the start / end of fraud notification is set.

  The game control device 600 first determines that the radio wave sensor 24 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 24 and taken into the third input port 622a (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 621a. It is determined whether or not a radio wave is detected (A7701). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of A7701 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (A7702).

  The game control device 600 prepares a radio fraud notification command (A7703), prepares a radio fraud occurrence flag as a radio fraud flag (A7704), and the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether to do (A7709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A7701 is “N”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 600 sets the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time to 0. Otherwise, -1 is updated (A7705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (A7706).

  When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7706 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 600 ends the radio wave fraud monitoring process. In addition, when the value of the radio fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7706 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the period of the fraud notification ends or from the beginning When fraud notification is not performed, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (A7707), a radio fraud cancel flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (A7708), and the prepared radio fraud flag is stored in the radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether or not the value matches (A7709).

  When the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (result of A7709 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends the radio fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is “N”), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (A7710), command setting processing is performed (A7711), and radio fraud monitoring processing is terminated. To do.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1614) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In the external information editing process, information collection is performed based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (A1604), the prize opening switch / error monitoring process (A1607), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1612), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1613). Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as a terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  First, the game control device 600 performs a main prize ball signal editing process (A7801) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out, and performs a start opening signal editing process (A7802) for editing a winning opening winning signal. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0, −1 is updated (A7803). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A7804).

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (the result of A7804 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the game control device 600 sets off the symbol determination number signal off data. Save in the external information output data area (A7805). On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (the result of A7804 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the ON data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7806). ). Thereafter, processing for setting information according to the error state and the security state is performed.

  In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, the game control device 600 first starts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like. ) Is updated unless the security signal control timer that counts time is 0 (A7807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (A7808).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A7808 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 600 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area ( A7818), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  In addition, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A7808 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, a glass frame open error is occurring (the result of A7809 is “ Y "), a front frame opening error is occurring (result of A7810 is" Y "), a lower prize winning is incorrect (A7811 result is" Y "), and an upper winning prize is incorrect (result of A7812 is “Y”), when a power transmission fraud is occurring (result of A7813 is “Y”), magnet fraud is occurring (result of A7814 is “Y”), or radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A7815 is “Y”) The security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7818), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (A7819). To end the collection process. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A7808 is “Y”), and no error has occurred (result of A7809 to A7815 is “N”), the security signal Is saved in the external information output data area (A7816), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7817), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A7801) in the external information editing process (FIG. 78) described above will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of main prize ball signal editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  First, the game control device 600 updates −1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A7901). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A7902). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A7902 is “Y”), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (A7903).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A7903 is “N”), the game control device 600 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A7904), and the main prize ball signal output control. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the timer area (A7905). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) in which the main prize ball signal is on (eg, high level) and the time (eg, 64 ms) in the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7907), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (the result of A7903 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A7908), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A7902 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section. (A7906). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (the result of A7906 is "Y"), the process proceeds to A7907. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (the result of A7906 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data area of the RWM. (A7908) and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (A7802) in the above-described external information editing process (FIG. 78) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of start port signal editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 601 or the second start port switch 602.

  First, the game control device 600 updates −1 if the start signal output control timer is not 0 (A8001). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A8002). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8002 is “Y”), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (A8003).

  If the start port signal output count is not 0 (the result of A8003 is “N”), the game control device 600 updates the start port signal output count by −1 (A8004), and enters the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is saved (A8005). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8007), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. When the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (the result of A8003 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( A8008), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8002 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (A8006). ). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A8006 is “Y”), the process proceeds to A8007. Further, when the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A8006 is “N”), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8008), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[1st CPU main processing (production control device)]
Next, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (1st main processing) executed by the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 710 of the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The main process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 700, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 710 first prohibits interruption (B1001). Next, the RAM 711 as a work area is cleared to 0 (B1002), and CPU initialization processing is executed (B1003). Thereafter, initial values necessary for executing various processes are set in the RAM 711 (B1004), and a random number initialization process is executed (B1005).

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 activates various interrupt timers for generating an interrupt at a predetermined timing (for example, 1 millisecond) (B1006), and permits the interrupt (B1007). When the interrupt is permitted, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600 is executable.

  The main control microcomputer 710 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization process (B1003) and monitors whether the CPU is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU is reset.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 detects an operation signal of the effect button 17 by the player, or executes a process according to the detected signal (B1009). Further, a game control command analysis process for analyzing the game control command received from the game control device 600 is executed (B1010).

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a test mode process (B1011). In the test mode process, an inspection command is received at the time of inspection at the time of shipment from the factory, and LED lighting or the like is inspected. Therefore, the test mode process is executed when the CPU is inspected at the time of factory shipment.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a 1st scene control process for controlling a scene (display content) to be displayed on the variable display device 35 based on the control command analyzed in the game control command analysis process (B1010) ( B1012). In the 1st scene control process, the display contents of the screen are controlled in an integrated manner. Also included is a pre-reading notice control process for informing in advance that a variable display game with a high expectation level of jackpot is executed. The first scene control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a gaming machine error monitoring process for monitoring occurrence of abnormality in the gaming machine 1 (B1013). In addition to the abnormality relating to the effect control device 700, when a command for instructing error notification is received from the game control device 600, a predetermined process such as alarm sound notification is executed.

  Then, the main control microcomputer 710 executes an effect command editing process for editing a command (such as an effect command) to be transmitted to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720 (B1014).

  The main control microcomputer 710 executes sound control processing for controlling sound output from the speaker 10 (B1015). In the sound control process, for example, control for outputting a sound is executed in accordance with an operation input of the operation unit 15.

  Further, a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 760, frame decoration device 21) made up of LEDs or the like is executed (B1016). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed in accordance with an operation input of the operation unit 15.

  Further, a motor / SOL control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 770, frame effect device 22) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid or movable illumination 9 is executed (B1017). In the motor / SOL control process, for example, in response to an operation input from the operation unit 15, the fan is activated to execute the air blowing effect, or the solenoid is driven to execute the accessory operation effect. Furthermore, the negative ion generator, the odor generator, and the scent blender may be driven to produce an effect that works on the player's sense of smell and the like.

  Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 executes random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers (B1018), and returns to the processing of B1008. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1018 is repeated.

[1st scene control processing]
Next, details of the 1st scene control process (B1012) in the 1st main process (FIG. 81) described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the 1st scene control process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the testing mode (B1101). In the case of the in-test mode (the result of B1101 is “Y”), it is not necessary to actually perform the production control, so the 1st scene control process is terminated.

  When the gaming machine 1 is not in the testing mode (the result of B1101 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a scene change command transmitted from the gaming control device 600 has been received ( B1102). If the scene change command has not been received (the result of B1102 is “N”), the processing after B1107 is executed. The scene change command is a command corresponding to the processing of B1108 to B1116 described later, and is, for example, a “power-on command” or “power failure recovery command”.

  When the main control microcomputer 710 has received the scene change command (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 acquires the updated (current) gaming state (B1103). Further, it is determined whether a valid command is received (B1104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change destination scene matches the current gaming state. If the main control microcomputer 710 has not received a valid command (the result of B1104 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes the processing after B1107.

  When receiving a valid command (result of B1104 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 saves the received command in a predetermined area of the memory (RAM) (B1105). Further, an effect request flag is set (B1106). The effect request flag is a flag indicating that it is time to change the scene, and a process according to whether or not the effect request flag is set is executed in the changing process (B1111) described later.

  Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes processing according to the received identifier of the scene change command (B1107).

  When the received command identifier indicates “power-on command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a power-on process (B1108). In the power-on process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on is controlled.

  When the received command identifier indicates “power failure recovery command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a power failure recovery process (B1109). In the power failure recovery process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure is controlled. It should be noted that no special process is executed when the customer waiting process is executed before the power failure.

  When the received command identifier indicates “customer waiting demo command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a customer waiting process (B1110). In the customer waiting process, control is performed to display a customer waiting screen when a predetermined time T elapses after receiving the customer waiting demo command (A3814). The customer-waiting demonstration command is prepared and set by the special chart routine process (FIG. 38) (A3814).

  When the identifier of the received command indicates “variation pattern command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes the changing process (B1111). In the changing process, information necessary for displaying a scene corresponding to the set change pattern is acquired, and effect control corresponding to the set change pattern is performed.

  The main control microcomputer 710 executes symbol stop processing when the identifier of the received command indicates “symbol stop command” (B1112). In the symbol stop process, the symbol variation display is stopped at the specified symbol.

  When the received command identifier indicates “fanfare command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes fanfare processing (B1113). In the fanfare process, a fanfare corresponding to the generated jackpot is output.

  The main control microcomputer 710 executes the in-round processing when the identifier of the received command indicates “large-open-release n-th command” (B1114). In the round process, effect control during each round in the special gaming state is performed.

  When the received command identifier indicates “interval command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes interval processing (B1115). In the interval process, effect control between each round in the special gaming state is performed.

  The main control microcomputer 710 executes an ending process when the identifier of the received command indicates “ending command” (B1116). In the ending process, effect control is performed when the special gaming state is finished.

  Subsequently, when the execution of the process based on each command is completed, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a symbol command receiving process for receiving a symbol command (B1117). The symbol command includes information for designating a stop symbol.

  Further, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a hold number command receiving process for receiving a decoration special figure hold number command (B1118). The decorative special figure hold number command (special figure hold number command) is a command for notifying the updated hold number. In the hold number command reception process, the hold display and the like are updated based on the received hold number.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a prefetch command reception process (B1119). The prefetch command reception process is a process of setting a prefetch effect such as a hold display effect based on a prefetch command (also referred to as a prior determination command). In the prefetch command reception process, the main control microcomputer 710 receives a prefetch symbol command (preliminary effect symbol command) and a prefetch variation pattern command (preliminary effect command) as the prefetch command (preliminary determination command), and the received prior determination command. Is stored in the corresponding start storage area (a part of the RAM 711) as pre-read information. The main control microcomputer 710 acquires the starting memory symbol information from the pre-reading symbol command as pre-reading information, and acquires the starting memory reach system information from the pre-reading variation pattern command. The main control microcomputer 710 determines from the symbol information whether the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start-up memory is a loss or a big hit, and further determines the prefetch information (the information of the determination result of the loss / big hit and the reach system) Based on the information), the production information related to the pre-reading production is set in the start storage area. Here, the prefetch effect is an effect based on the prefetch information, and is a prefetch notice effect (including a continuous notice effect and a hold display effect) or other effects.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a probability information command reception process (B1120). The probability information command reception process is a process for setting a gaming state such as an internal probability based on the received probability information command. The probability information command includes, for example, a high accuracy / short time command, a low accuracy / short time command, a low accuracy / no support command, and the like.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes an effect command reception process (B1121). The effect command receiving process is a process of setting an effect excluding the jackpot effect and the prefetch effect (notice effect), for example, a specific effect and a special effect, based on the received effect command. The production command includes, for example, a touch-on / touch-off command, a firing stop switch command, and the like. Thereafter, the main control microcomputer ends this processing.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 performs processing for fetching the port value of the command transmitted from the game control device 600 (B1201). Then, it is determined whether or not the MODE command is waiting (B1202). Here, when the MODE command is waiting (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the data strobe signal SSTB is ON (B1203), and the data strobe signal SSTB is ON. If it is in a state (the result of B1203 is “Y”), it is determined whether the received command is a MODE command (B1204).

  When the received command is a MODE command (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 performs processing for calculating the address of the command buffer corresponding to the reception pointer (B1205), and the calculated address The command is saved as a MODE command (B1206). Subsequently, an initial value is set in the timeout monitoring timer, a process for starting the timer (B1207) is performed, a process for setting an ACTION command waiting state is performed (B1208), and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the data strobe signal SSTB is not in an ON state (result of B1203 is “N”) or when it is determined that the received command is not a MODE command (result of B1204 is “N”), The microcomputer 710 performs processing for stopping the timeout monitoring timer (B1217), performs processing for setting the MODE command waiting state (B1218), and ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  When the MODE command is not waiting, that is, when the ACTION command is waiting (the result of B1202 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the timeout monitoring timer has timed out (B1209). ). If the time-out has not occurred (the result of B1209 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the data strobe signal SSTB is ON (B1210), and the data strobe signal SSTB is ON. Is determined (the result of B1210 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the received command is a MODE command (B1211).

  If the received command is not a MODE command (the result of B1211 is “N”), processing for calculating the address of the command buffer corresponding to the reception pointer is performed (B1212), and the command is set to the ACTION command after the calculation. Is saved (B1213). Subsequently, after performing a process (B1214) for updating the value of the number of received commands by 1 (B1214), a process for stopping the timeout monitoring timer (B1217) is performed, and a process for setting the MODE command waiting state (B1218) is performed. The reception interrupt process is terminated.

  When the time-out occurs (the result of B1209 is “Y”) or when the data strobe signal SSTB is not ON (the result of B1210 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the reception pointer. Processing for calculating the address of the corresponding command buffer is performed (B1215), and processing for discarding the MODE command saved in the command buffer at the calculated address is performed (B1216). Then, processing for stopping the timeout monitoring timer is performed (B1217), processing for setting the MODE command waiting state is performed (B1218), and the command reception interrupt processing is terminated. If it is determined that the received command is a MODE command (the result of B1211 is “Y”), the process proceeds to B1205, and the subsequent processing is performed.

[2nd main processing (production control device)]
Next, details of the other main process executed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (2nd main processing) executed by the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720 of the effect control device 700 according to the embodiment of the present invention. The 2nd CPU main process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  First, the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720 executes CPU initialization processing (B1301). Then, the RAM 721 as a work area is cleared to 0 (B1302), and initial values necessary for executing various processes are set in the RAM 721 (B1303). Then, a VDP initialization process for initializing a graphic processor that performs image processing is executed (B1304). Next, various interrupts such as a V blank interrupt are permitted (B1305).

  Further, the video control microcomputer 720 executes initialization processing of various control processes (B1306). In the initialization process of various control processes, initialization of variables used in each control process to be described later is performed. For example, the background of the video displayed on the variable display device 35 is initialized, or the arrangement of symbols is initialized. Then, screen drawing of the variable display device 35 is permitted (B1307).

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 performs a process (B1308) of clearing a system cycle waiting flag set in a V blank interrupt process to be described later. If the system cycle wait flag is not “1” (the result of B1309 is “N”), the processing of B1309 is repeated until the system cycle wait flag is set in the V blank interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the system cycle wait flag is “1” (the result of B1309 is “Y”), a process (B1310) for clearing the watchdog timer (WDT) is performed, a normal game process (B1311) is performed, and B1308 is performed. Return to.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the normal game process (B1311) in the 2nd main process (FIG. 84) described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the base game process according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the video control microcomputer 720 performs processing (B1401) for checking a command received from the game control device 600. In the received command check process, the effect command (B1014) received from the main control microcomputer 710 is specified and classified according to the process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes background processing for performing background display on the variable display device 35 in accordance with the gaming state and the reach scene (B1402). Subsequently, a reel control / display process for performing display control related to variable display in the variable display device 35 is executed (B1403). Furthermore, the hold display that performs the hold display on the variable display device 35 based on the information of the hold display effect among the effect information (prefetch effect information) stored in the start storage area (prefetch storage area) in the prefetch command receiving process described above. The process is executed (B1404).

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a customer waiting demo process for setting a customer waiting demo screen in the variable display device 35 after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demo command (B1405). Details of the customer waiting demonstration process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the video control microcomputer 720 executes 2nd scene control / display processing for determining the contents to be displayed on the variable display device 35 (B1406). The video control microcomputer 720 interprets the effect command (B1014) and determines the content to be displayed. Next, the data stored in the image ROM 704 is transferred to the RAM, and the display system process to be actually displayed on the variable display device 35 is executed (B1407), and the normal game process is terminated.

[V blank interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
The V blank interrupt process is started when a periodic V blank interrupt signal is input to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 720 every 16.6 ms (1/2 of the frame period 33 ms), for example.

  When the V blank interrupt process is started, the video control microcomputer 720 first performs a process of updating the value of the frame counter by +1 (B1501), and determines whether the value of the frame counter is equal to or greater than a specified value (B1502). ). Here, when the value of the frame counter is less than the specified value (result of B1502 is “N”), the V blank interrupt processing is terminated, and when the value of the frame counter is equal to or greater than the specified value (result of B1502 is “Y”). ) Determines whether the system cycle wait flag is “0” (B1503).

  If it is determined that the system cycle wait flag is not “0” (the result of B1503 is “N”), the video control microcomputer 720 ends the V blank interrupt process. If it is determined that the system cycle wait flag is “0” (the result of B1503 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the drawing that the VDP 730 displays on the variable display device 35 is completed (B1504).

  When it is determined that the VDP 730 has not completed drawing (the result of B1504 is “N”), the video control microcomputer 720 ends the V blank interrupt processing. When it is determined that the VDP 730 has completed drawing (the result of B1504 is “Y”), a process of switching the display frame buffer is performed (B1505), and the drawing start to the display frame buffer switched to the VDP 730 is instructed (B1506). ). By setting the specified value to “2”, for example, it is possible to basically switch frames once every two V blank interrupts.

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 performs a process of setting a VDP drawing flag indicating that the VDP 730 has started drawing (B1507), then clears the frame counter to 0 (B1508), and sets the system cycle wait flag as a flag. The process of setting “1” (B1509) is sequentially performed, and the V blank interrupt process ends.

[Time Chart 1]
FIG. 87 is a time chart illustrating an example of timing at which the game control device 600 that has received the touch switch signal according to the first embodiment of the present invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. This example shows the command transmission timing when the player operates the operation unit 15 for a certain period.

  At time t0, a touch switch signal (high level signal) that turns on the payout control device 640 is transmitted, and the game control device 600 receives the signal. Since the game control device 600 outputs a command to the effect control device 700 after waiting for a certain period, no touch-on command is output at time t0.

  At time t1 when a certain period (32 ms) has elapsed from time t0, the game control device 600 transmits a touch-on command to the effect control device 700. In order to prevent a command from being transmitted due to noise detection, the game control device 600 waits for a certain period of time, but in order to maintain a sense of link between the player's operation and the effects of the gaming machine 1, For example, a short period of 32 ms is set.

  Thereafter, at time t2 when the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15, a touch switch signal (low level signal) that turns off the payout control device 640 is transmitted, and the game control device 600 receives the signal. Since the game control device 600 outputs a command to the effect control device 700 after waiting for a certain period, no touch-off command is output at time t2.

  At time t3 when a certain period (4000 ms) has elapsed from time t2, game control device 600 transmits a touch-off command to effect control device 700. When the game control device 600 detects a continuous ON / OFF signal in a short period of time, the predetermined period is long, for example, 4000 ms so that commands are not frequently transmitted to the effect control device 700. A period is set.

  As described above, even when the operation of the operation unit 15 is started, the command is transmitted to the effect control device 700 after the game control device 600 waits for a certain period of time. Can be prevented from being transmitted.

  In addition, since a certain waiting period is provided until the touch-off command is transmitted to the effect control device 700 after the operation of the operation unit 15 is stopped, each time the operation start and operation stop of the operation unit 15 are repeated. Commands are never sent. For this reason, the processing burden of the effect control device 700 is reduced.

[Time Chart 2]
FIG. 88 is a time chart illustrating an example of timing at which the game control device 600 that continuously receives a touch switch signal according to the first embodiment of the present invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. This example shows command transmission timing when the player repeatedly starts and stops operation of the operation unit 15.

  If the signal state changes (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) within the waiting period until command transmission, the command transmission preparation is canceled (A8112 in FIGS. 17A and 17B), so that the game control device 600 is the effect control device 700. Do not send commands to.

  The player starts operating the operation unit 15 and a touch-on command is transmitted. Thereafter, at time t0, the player temporarily stops the operation of the operation unit 15, so that a pay switch signal (low level signal) that turns off the payout control device 640 is transmitted, and the game control device 600 receives the signal.

  Here, until the time t1 when the waiting period of 4000 ms ends, if no signal change occurs, the game control device 600 transmits a touch-off command (command ON indicated by a dotted line at time t1). The command is not transmitted because the signal state has changed since operation 15 has been started. For this reason, even if the signal state changes during the standby period, the effect control device 700 recognizes that the operation state continues.

  Thereafter, at time t2 when the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15, a touch switch signal (low level signal) that turns off the payout control device 640 is transmitted, and the game control device 600 receives the signal. Thereafter, at time t3 when 4000 ms has elapsed, a touch-off command based on the signal is transmitted.

  Thus, even if the signal state changes within the waiting period until command transmission, the command based on the signal change is not transmitted. Even if the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15 for a short time and returns to the operation again, the command transmission of both the off command accompanying the operation stop and the on command accompanying the operation return is suppressed. The processing burden on the apparatus 700 is reduced.

[Time Chart 3]
FIG. 89 is a time chart showing that the game control apparatus 600 that has received a low-level touch switch signal immediately after receiving a high-level touch switch signal according to the first embodiment of the present invention does not output a touch-on command. is there. As a cause of the change of the touch switch signal from ON to OFF in a period of less than 32 ms, there is signal disturbance due to noise intrusion.

  At time t0, a touch switch signal (high level signal) that turns on the payout control device 640 is transmitted, and the game control device 600 receives the signal.

  Here, until the time t1 when the waiting period of 32 ms ends, if no signal change occurs, the game control device 600 transmits a touch-on command (command ON indicated by a dotted line at the time t1), but the signal state does not change within the waiting period. The command is not sent because it has changed. For this reason, even if noise enters the signal line, command transmission is suppressed as a signal change within the standby period, and the effect control device 700 recognizes that the operation unit 15 is continuously in the OFF state.

(Effects of the first embodiment)
As described above, according to the first embodiment, when the game control device 600 receives a high-level touch switch signal from the payout control device 640, it transmits a touch-on command to the effect control device 700. In addition, when the game control device 600 receives a low-level touch switch signal from the payout control device 640, the game control device 600 transmits a touch-off command to the effect control device 700. For this reason, the production control device 700 that has received the command can recognize the operation status of the operation unit 15 and can produce an effect according to the operation status of the operation unit 15.

  Further, according to the first embodiment, when the game control device 600 makes a touch switch signal, the game control device 600 transmits a command to the game control device 600 only when the signal state does not change during a certain waiting period. Therefore, even when an operation for switching on / off of the operation unit 15 at high speed is performed, it is possible to suppress frequent transmission of commands to the effect control device 700 and to reduce the processing load of the effect control device 700. .

  Further, according to the first embodiment, the standby period when a high-level touch-on signal is received is set to be shorter than the standby period when a low-level touch-on signal is received. In particular, since a standby period when a high-level touch-on signal is received is set to a short period of about 3/100 seconds, a feeling of linking between operation input and effect is suppressed while suppressing command transmission based on noise intrusion. Can be maintained.

  In addition, according to the first embodiment, the game control device 600 manages the waiting period from when a signal is received to when a command is transmitted. For this reason, the waiting period until the touch-off command is transmitted can be set to a short period according to the gaming state, and the quick operation input of the operation unit 15 can be reflected in the effect.

  The management of the waiting period may be performed by the payout control device 640. When the payout control device 640 transmits a signal after the waiting period, the game control device 600 only needs to transmit a command based on the received signal to the effect control device 700, and the processing load on the game control device 600 is reduced. Can do. Further, when a signal is directly transmitted from the payout control device 640 to the effect control device 700 without going through the game control device 600, the processing load of the game control device 600 can be reduced with a simpler configuration. .

(Second Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, a touch effect in which the content of the effect is advanced by an operation input from the operation unit 15 will be described.

[Time Chart 4]
FIG. 90 is a time chart illustrating an example of timing at which the game control device 600 outputs a touch-on / touch-off command when the touch effect flag according to the second embodiment of this invention is ON / OFF. The touch effect flag is set to ON when a specific variation pattern is executed, and this example shows the timing of command transmission when the touch effect flag that was set to OFF is set to ON at time t2. .

  From time t0 to time t1, since the touch effect flag is set to OFF (the result of A8108 in FIGS. 17A and 17B is “N”), the touch-off command is transmitted after the standby period of 4000 ms.

  Thereafter, at time t2, the touch effect flag is set to ON. When the touch effect flag is set to ON, for example, the standby period of the touch-off command is shortened from 4000 ms to 32 ms so that the operation input of the operation unit 15 is quickly reflected in the effect.

  At time t3, when a touch switch signal (high level signal) that turns on the payout control device 640 is transmitted and the game control device 600 receives the signal, the game control device 600 touches at time t4 after 32 ms has elapsed. Send on command. The standby period of the touch-on command is set to be constant regardless of the setting of the touch effect flag.

  Thereafter, at time t5, a touch switch signal (low level signal) that turns off the payout control device 640 is transmitted, and when the game control device 600 receives the signal, the game control device 600 touches at time t6 when 32 ms elapses. Send on command.

  As described above, when the touch switch signal is used for the production of the gaming machine 1, the touch-off signal is also set to a short period of 32 ms, so that a link feeling can be maintained for continuous operation input.

[Time Chart 5]
FIG. 91 is a time chart illustrating an example of operation timing when the touch operation according to the second embodiment of the present invention is successful. As an example of the touch effect, this example shows the control timing when the gaming machine 1 requests that the operation unit 15 be touched three or more times during the touch effect period and the player's operation is successful.

  As the touch effect, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation input of the operation unit 15 is executed during the execution period of the variable display game executed in the specific change pattern of the display unit. As for the touch effect, for example, the effect content is displayed on the display unit 35a, the operation of the operation unit 15 is successful and the touch effect at the time of success is executed, and the touch effect at the time of failure due to the operation failure is executed. Divided into cases. The operation of the operation unit 15 detected in the touch effect includes a touch operation on the firing handle and an ON / OFF operation of the firing stop switch 110. Depending on the effect mode of the touch effect, a rotation operation of the firing handle may be included. As described above, during the period in which the touch effect is executed, the command based on the touch-off signal is also transmitted after waiting for 32 ms, and the effect control device 700 can accurately recognize the operation input even if the operation unit 15 is operated at high speed. It is.

  At time t0 when the execution of the touch effect is started, for example, a message “Please touch the firing handle three or more times!” Is displayed on the display unit 35a. When the operation unit 15 is touched three times and a touch-on command based on the signal is transmitted from time t0 to time t1, which is a touch effect period, the success condition is achieved after time t1 because the success condition is achieved. Executed. Here, the count of the number of touch operations and the determination as to whether or not the game has been successful may be executed by the game control device 600 or the presentation control device 700.

[Time Chart 6]
FIG. 92 is a time chart illustrating an example of operation timing when the touch operation according to the second embodiment of this invention fails. As an example of the touch effect, this example shows the control timing when the gaming machine 1 requests that the operation unit 15 be touched three or more times during the touch effect period, and the player's operation fails.

  At time t0 when the execution of the touch effect is started, for example, a message “Please touch the firing handle three or more times!” Is displayed on the display unit 35a. At time t0-time t1, which is a touch production period, the operation unit 15 is touched once and a touch-on command based on the operation signal is transmitted. However, since the success condition has not been achieved, the failure occurs after time t1. The production is executed.

  As described above, the effect contents can be changed depending on whether the achievement condition is indicated and the achievement condition can be achieved based on the operation input during the touch effect period.

[Time Chart 7]
FIG. 93 is a time chart illustrating an example of operation timing when the touch operation is successful by the operation of the firing stop switch 110 according to the second embodiment of this invention. In this example, as an example of the touch effect, the gaming machine 1 requests that the operation unit 15 be operated three times or more during the touch effect period, and the player succeeds when the player operates the firing stop switch operation three times. The control timing in the case is shown.

  At time t0 when the execution of the touch effect is started, for example, a message “Please touch the firing handle three or more times!” Is displayed on the display unit 35a. As described above, since the operations counted in the touch effect are the touch operation of the firing handle and the ON / OFF operation of the firing stop switch 110, the success condition is also determined by the ON / OFF operation of the firing stop switch 110 instead of the touch operation. Can be met.

  From time t0 to time t1, which is a touch effect period, the firing stop switch 110 is turned ON / OFF three times, and a firing stop SW on command and a firing stop SW off command based on the operation signal are transmitted. Since the success condition has been achieved, the success effect is executed after time t1.

[Time Chart 8]
FIG. 94 is a time chart illustrating an example of operation timing when the touch operation is successful by the firing stop switch operation and the touch operation according to the second embodiment of this invention. In this example, as an example of the touch effect, the gaming machine 1 requests that the operation unit 15 be operated three times or more during the touch effect period, and the player performs the firing stop switch operation twice and the firing handle touch operation 1 The control timing when the operation is successful by performing the operation once.

  At time t0 when the execution of the touch effect is started, for example, a message “Please touch the firing handle three or more times!” Is displayed on the display unit 35a.

  From time t0 to time t1, which is a touch effect period, the firing stop switch 110 is turned ON / OFF twice, and a firing stop SW on command and a firing stop SW off command based on the operation signal are transmitted. In addition, from time t0 to time t1, the firing handle is touched once, and a touch-on command based on the operation signal is transmitted. Since the success condition has been achieved, the success effect is executed after time t1.

  In this way, since the effect can be advanced by the operation input of the operation unit 15, an effect of a new sense can be provided and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

A launch stop switch signal may also be input from the payout control device 640 to the effect control device 700. Since the standby period is not provided for the launch stop switch signal until the command is transmitted, it is not necessary to use the game control device 600, and the configuration can be simplified by not using the game control device 600.
In addition to the firing stop switch, a production operation switch may be provided in the operation unit. By providing an operation switch different from the firing stop switch in the operation unit, it is possible to perform a production operation without affecting the firing operation.

(Effect of the second embodiment)
As described above, according to the second embodiment, a success or failure effect is executed according to the operation of the operation unit 15, so that an unprecedented effect can be provided and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can do. In particular, since the effect control is executed in the operation input of the operation unit 15 separately from the effect button 17, it becomes an unprecedented effect method.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, since the operation input is performed by the operation unit 15, the operation burden on the player is reduced. To operate the effect button 17 (push button) arranged on the upper plate unit 11, the user must bother to move to the position of the effect button 17. When the button effect is frequently executed, for example, It becomes necessary to operate the operation unit 15 with the right hand and to operate the effect buttons with the left hand, and the operation becomes complicated. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, by operating only the operation unit 15, in addition to the operation for launching the game ball, it is possible to perform an operation input for a touch effect, which reduces the operation burden on the player. In particular, if the operation input is an ON / OFF operation of the firing stop switch 110, it is not necessary to release the hand from the operation unit 15, so that the operation input becomes easier.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the effect button 17 which is an operation means dedicated to the effect, so the number of parts of the gaming machine frame can be reduced and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, during the touch effect period, the standby period of the touch-off command is set to a short period, so that the effect of continuously operating the operation unit 15 within a predetermined time can be executed.

(Third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, a touch effect associated with a notice effect will be described.

[Specific production (touch production)]
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect (touch effect) effect screen according to the third embodiment of the present invention. In this example, a ball insertion game linked with a launch handle is executed as one form of touch production.

  Screen (A) is a screen showing a state in which the touch effect is started. The onion 83 is displayed, and the mouth of the onion 83 is closed by a lid 84. In addition, “Put a ball aiming at ☆!” Is displayed, and the player is encouraged to fly the ball to the onion by rotating the launch handle. The symbol variation of the variation display game is executed in the upper left area of the screen, and two start memories are displayed in the special diagram 1 hold display portion 81.

  When the operation of the operation unit 15 is not started, the screen (A) is continuously displayed.

  The screen (B) is a screen showing a state in which the operation of the operation unit 15 is started and the ball 85 is thrown (thrown in) toward the onion. When the operation of the operation unit 15 is started and a touch-on command is transmitted to the effect control device 700, the lid 83 is lifted upward to open the lid, and the ball 85 can be received.

  In the ball insertion game, for example, the ball 85 is thrown into the onion in synchronization with the timing at which the game ball is launched, and the momentum thrown in according to the launching force is strengthened. Note that the lid 83 is lifted upward when the operation unit 15 is operated, but may be lifted upward regardless of the operation of the operation unit 15 when the operation effective period of the touch effect is started.

  The screen (C) is a screen showing a state where the game ball has won the first start winning opening 37 and the ball 85 of the ball insertion game enters the onion. Three start memories are displayed in accordance with the winning of Special Figure 1. The ball 85 of the ball insertion game enters the ball when winning at the starting opening (the first starting winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38), but when the game ball wins the general winning opening 40, or when it is normally started The ball 85 may enter the onion even after passing through the gate 16. Further, when the touch effect can be executed even during the big hit, when the special variable winning device (the first special variable winning device 41 or the second special variable winning device 42) is won, the ball 85 enters the onion. May be executed.

  The screen (D) shows that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 37, but the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15 (releases the hand from the firing handle) before the winning, and the onion 84 is closed. It is a screen which shows the state where the ball 85 was flipped by the lid 83. Three start memories are displayed in accordance with the winning of Special Figure 1.

  When the touch-off command is transmitted to the effect control device 700, the lid 83 is closed, so that the touch effect that links the presence / absence of the operation and the effect has an effect of suppressing the stoppage.

  The screen (E) is a screen showing a state in which the launch stop switch 110 is pressed and the ball 85 is not thrown in. Since the player is touching the operation unit 15, the touch-on command is transmitted to the effect control device 700, but since the firing stop switch 110 is ON, the launching of the game ball is stopped, and the ball 85 of the ball is inserted. Even throwing has been stopped. When the firing stop switch 110 is released (the firing stop switch 110 is turned OFF), the state shifts to the state shown in the screen (B).

  As described above, the touch effect is determined by whether the player is touching the operation unit 15, rotating the operation unit 15, whether the game ball has won a start opening, or operating the firing stop switch 110, The contents of the production change. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unprecedented production of new sensations and enhance the fun of the game.

[Notice production]
FIG. 96 is a screen transition diagram showing an example of the notice effect after execution of the specific effect (touch effect) according to the third embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the ball 85 that has entered the onion 84 by the ball insertion game as one form of the notice effect informs the expected start memory.

  The screen (A) is a screen for notifying that the onion 84 is tilted and that there are three balls 85 that have entered the onion 84.

  The screen (B) is a screen on which the ball 85 that has been in the onion 84 moves above the start memory and notifies the expected degree of the start memory. The start memory to be pre-read is pre-read separately for special figure 1 start memory and special figure 2 start memory. For example, two prizes are won in the first start prize opening 37, two balls 85 enter the onion 84 based on the prize, one prize is entered in the second start prize slot 38, and one is awarded based on the prize. When the ball 85 enters the onion 84, two special figure 1 start memories and one special figure 2 start memory are prefetched.

  Note that the notice effect may be executed within the execution period of the variable display game in which the touch effect is executed, or may be executed in an interval period after the variable display game in which the touch effect is executed.

[Time Chart 9]
FIG. 97 is a time chart showing the timing when the operation of the operation unit 15 and the notice effect are started in the big hit fluctuation according to the third embodiment of this invention. This example notifies that the lottery result is a big hit as one form of the notice effect before the result of the variable display game is determined.

  As the notice effect, there is a so-called one-shot notice effect that notifies in advance that the result of the running variable display game is a big hit. FIG. 97 shows a time chart in which the operation of the operation unit 15 is associated with the one-shot notification effect.

  When the operation of the operation unit 15 is stopped and the touch-on command is transmitted after the operation of the operation unit 15 is stopped during the execution of the variable display game that is a big hit, the one-notification effect (notice effect) is executed (time t0). ).

  In this way, even if the operation is stopped once during the period when the variable display game that is a big hit is executed, a single announcement effect is produced at the timing of returning to the operation thereafter, so the player feels refreshed with an unexpected feeling Can be given.

[Time Chart 10]
FIG. 98 is a time chart showing the timing at which the firing instruction effect executed when the operation unit 15 is not operated before the winning opening is opened according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  The launch instruction effect is an effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball when the operation of the operation unit 15 is stopped and a winning opening is scheduled to be opened. Here, the winning opening is, for example, an attacker (first special variable winning device 41 and second special variable winning device 42) or an electric tulip (a pair of movable members 38a of the second start winning port 38).

  At time t0, the opening condition such as a winning opening is established, but since the operation unit 15 is not operated, the launch instruction effect is started, prompting the player to launch the game ball. Thereafter, at time t1, the launch display effect ends, and the winning opening is opened.

  In this manner, when the touch switch signal is at a low level in spite of the establishment of a winning opening or the like, the firing instruction effect is executed, so the player is notified of the operation resumption timing. Can be shortened.

  Note that the launch instruction effect may be executed when an opening condition such as a prize opening is not established, and the fun of the game can be enhanced by generating the gaze effect at a certain rate.

(Effect of the third embodiment)
As described above, according to the third embodiment, the touch effect depends on the touch switch signal, the ON / OFF status of the firing stop switch 110, the amount of rotation of the firing handle, and the detection status of the winning detection at the start opening. The content changes. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unprecedented production of new sensations and enhance the fun of the game. In addition, in the progress control of the touch effect, the number of warped passing balls, the number of out balls, and the like may be incorporated in the change element of the effect. Further, a change in the background or the like according to the gaming state or a progress change may occur.

  In addition, according to the third embodiment, since the notice effect according to the progress of the touch effect can be executed, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the touch effect and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to provide an unprecedented production of a touch production and a notice production.

  In addition, according to the third embodiment, even if the operation is stopped once during the period when the variable display game that is a big hit is executed, a single announcement effect is produced at the timing when the operation is returned to the subsequent operation. A refreshing feeling can be given along with an unexpected feeling.

  In addition, according to the third embodiment, when the touch switch signal is at a low level in spite of the release condition such as a prize opening being established, the firing instruction effect is executed. Thus, the operation resumption timing can be notified, and the stopping time can be shortened.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a specific effect that is executed according to the number of start memories and the ON / OFF state of a touch switch signal will be described.

  For the purpose of retaining a player who intends to quit the game or releasing the stop early, in this embodiment, when a touch-off command is transmitted and the number of held is large, the player is fired. An effect that encourages the player (for example, a normal roulette simulation effect) is executed, and when the number of reservations is small, an effect that retains the player (for example, a transition to a specific game mode such as a mission mode) is executed. .

[Fluctuation processing]
First, details of the changing process (B1111) in the first scene control process (FIG. 82) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the changing process according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In the changing process, information necessary for displaying a scene corresponding to the set change pattern is acquired, and effect control corresponding to the set change pattern is performed.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not an effect request flag is set (B1601). When the effect request flag is set (result of B1601 is “Y”), various information is set.

  Specifically, the main control microcomputer 710 first clears the effect button related information (B1602). The effect button related information is input information by the effect button 17. Next, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a movable body request (B1603). That is, the operation mode of the movable illumination or the electric accessory is set according to the contents of the production.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a variation count management process (B1604). In the variation count management process, the number of short-term variations is managed. Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes variation pattern information setting processing (B1605). In the variation pattern information setting process, a special symbol variation display game stop symbol, variation time, notice effect, etc. are set based on the variation pattern command. Also, a touch effect and a notice effect that is executed following the touch effect are set.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes random number seed initialization processing (B1606). The random number seed initialization process is a process for initializing a random number seed used for determining the contents of the production.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (B1607), and clears the effect request flag (B1608). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the effect request flag is not set (the result of B1601 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not to change the display effect state by the update timer (B1609). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the update timer has expired. If the update timer has not expired (the result of B1609 is “N”), this process ends.

  When the update timer expires (result of B1609 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the next scene data set in the scene sequence table (B1610). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

[Specific effect setting processing]
Next, details of the specific effect setting process executed in the fluctuation pattern information setting process (B1605) in the above-described changing process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a specific effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 100B illustrates a process procedure in which a process for determining whether or not a firing stop switch command is received is added to FIG. 100A. .

  The “specific effect” in the present application is, for example, a normal roulette simulated effect that produces an effect that is similar to the normal roulette effect executed on the display device in accordance with the so-called general drawing lottery, the fluctuation or the start This is an effect of executing a transition to the mission mode selected at a predetermined rate when there is a start memory for generating a specific gaming state in the memory. The specific effect has an effect of increasing the player's expectation and improving the player's willingness to play.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a touch-off command has been received (B1701). If the touch-off command has not been received (B1701), the player is operating the operation unit 15, and thus this process is terminated.

  When the touch-off command has been received (B1702), the player has released his hand from the operation unit 15, so the main control microcomputer 710 next determines whether the current start memory number is 1 or not. Is determined (B1703). Since this process is executed at the start of fluctuation, one currently stored start memory is a start memory that is digested by the fluctuation.

  If the current start memory number is 1, next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the usual variable display game is currently being executed (B1704). If the normal map display game is being executed (the result of B1703 is “Y”), this process ends.

  If the normal map display game is not currently being executed (the result of B1703 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the first specific effect as the specific effect (B1704). The first specific effect is, for example, an effect of executing a normal roulette simulated effect described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the current start memory number is not 1 (the result of B1702 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the current start memory number is 4 (B1705). If the current start memory number is not 4 (the result of B1705 is “N”), this process is terminated.

  If the current start memory number is 4 (result of B1705 is “Y”), the second specific effect setting is set as the specific effect (B1706). For example, the second specific effect is an effect of executing a transition to the mission mode described in FIG.

  In this way, the presence / absence of operation of the operation unit 15 at the start of fluctuation and the number of starting memories are determined, and a specific effect according to the determination result is set, so that a player who wants to stop the game has a chance to win a prize. It is possible to provide an effect that gives a sense of expectation to the player who has stopped the game, and prompts the player to launch a game ball.

  The specific effect is not always executed when the touch-off command is received and the predetermined start memory number is satisfied, and may be executed at a certain rate when the execution condition is satisfied, In addition, even when the execution condition is not met, it may be executed at a certain rate. That is, the specific effect may be executed as a so-called gas effect.

  When the operation of the firing stop switch 110 is also monitored and the specific effect is set, step B1707 for determining whether or not a firing stop switch command has been received is added as shown in FIG. 100B.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 101 is a screen transition diagram illustrating the execution contents of the first specific effect according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. This example shows the case where the normal roulette simulation effect is executed and the case where it is not executed as an example of the first specific effect, and the transition screen depends on whether or not the touch sensor is detected at the timing when the new variable display game is executed. Branch.

  Screen (A) is a screen on which the variable display game has ended. In the special figure 1 hold display portion 81, one start memory is displayed.

  The screen (B-1) is a screen when the effect control device 700 receives a touch-on command at a timing when a new variable display game is executed. A new variation display game is executed and the special symbol is varied.

  The screen (B-2) is a screen when the effect control device 700 receives a touch-off command at the timing when a new variable display game is executed. A new variation display game is executed, the special symbol is fluctuating, and a normal roulette 86 is displayed between the special figure 1 hold display part 81 and the special figure 2 hold display part 82. In addition, the player is informed of the expectation that a temporary power support may occur, such as “Tulip will open when ★ appears” above the usual roulette. For this reason, there is a strong motive for the player to start the game ball launching operation aiming at the game area where the electric tulips (the pair of movable members 38a of the second start winning opening 38) are arranged.

  The basic roulette performance is basically executed as a so-called “gase” effect regardless of the actual general drawing lottery result. During the general roulette simulation, the game ball passes through the general start gate 36. Then, when the normal map change display game is actually executed, the changing normal map roulette simulation effect stops changing in accordance with the execution contents of the normal map change display game. In addition, if a general chart start memory occurs during the period in which the general chart roulette is stopped as a general map roulette simulation effect, the next general map roulette will be executed in accordance with the execution contents of the general map fluctuation display game. Stop fluctuation.

  In this way, when the effect control device 700 receives the touch-off command and the number of starting memories is small, the usual roulette simulation effect is executed, so that the player tries to resume the game ball firing operation. Give a strong motivation to do.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 102 is a screen transition diagram showing the execution content of the second specific effect according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. This example shows the case where the transition to the mission mode is executed and the case where it is not executed as an example of the second specific effect, and the transition screen is determined depending on whether or not the touch sensor is detected at the timing when the new variable display game is executed. Branch.

  Screen (A) is a screen on which the variable display game has ended. In the special figure 1 hold display section 81, four start memories are displayed.

  The screen (B-1) is a screen when the effect control device 700 receives a touch-on command at a timing when a new variable display game is executed. A new variation display game is executed and the special symbol is varied.

  The screen (B-2) is a screen when the effect control device 700 receives a touch-off command at the timing when a new variable display game is executed. A new change display game is executed, the special symbol is changed, and the mission mode is executed to notify the start of the mission mode. For this reason, there is a strong motive for the player to start a game ball launching operation in order to achieve the mission mode. In addition, it gives a sense of expectation that there may be a start memory for generating a special gaming state in the fluctuation or start memory, and gives the player a strong motivation to continue the game.

  Thus, when the production control device 700 receives the touch-off command and the number of starting memories is large, since the mission mode is executed, the player is given a strong motivation to continue the game. In addition, the 2nd specific production | presentation may perform the transfer to the mode with high jackpot expectation degree other than mission mode.

(Effect of the fourth embodiment)
As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, the presence / absence of operation of the operation unit 15 and the start memory number are determined at the start of fluctuation, and a specific effect according to the determination result is set. In particular, when the number of starting memories is large and the touch sensor is not detected, it is highly likely that the player has stopped, so the usual roulette simulation effect is executed and the player is given a game ball launch operation. Give strong motivation to resume. In addition, when the number of starting memories is small and the touch sensor is not detected, there is a high possibility that the player is going to quit the game. Therefore, strong motivation to execute the mission mode and allow the player to continue the game. give. Therefore, the operation is resumed by the player, and the operation of the gaming machine is enhanced.

  As a specific effect, when only the firing stop switch 110 is operated at a predetermined timing, a hidden command-like trick effect may be executed.

  In addition, as a fourth embodiment, when the touch sensor is not detected at the start of fluctuation, the execution frequency of the notice effect may be reduced. In addition, the premium effect may be executed only when the number of holdings is four at the start of the variation of the hit variation and the touch sensor is detected, and the stoppage can be suppressed.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment, a variation pattern of a variation display game selected in accordance with the start memory number and ON / OFF of the touch switch signal will be described.

  For the purpose of retaining a player who intends to quit the game or canceling the stop early, in this embodiment, at the time of touch-off, when the number of holding is large, a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, When the number of holds is small, a highly expected variation pattern is set.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure information setting processing according to the fifth embodiment of this invention. In the special figure information setting process of the present embodiment, a normal variation pattern selection group information table setting process is executed instead of the process of step A4302 (A4002a).

  FIG. 104A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of normal time variation pattern selection group information table setting processing according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 104B is a flowchart to which determination processing for determining whether or not a firing stop switch command is received is added. It is.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the current start memory number is 1 (A0401). If the current start memory number is not 1 (the result of A0401 is “N”), the game control device 600 next determines whether or not a touch sensor is detected (A0402).

  When the touch sensor is not detected (the result of A0402 is “N”), the first variation pattern selection group information is set as the variation pattern selection information. In the first variation pattern selection group information, a variation pattern with a short variation time is defined as shown in FIGS. When the start memory number is more than 1 and the touch sensor is not detected, it is highly likely that the player has stopped. Therefore, by executing a fluctuation display game with a short fluctuation time, an early launch operation The operation of the gaming machine can be improved by returning to the state.

  When the touch sensor is detected (the result of A0402 is “Y”), the second variation pattern selection group information is set as the variation pattern selection information. In the second variation pattern selection group information, a variation pattern having a slightly shorter variation time is defined as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106. When the start memory number is more than 1 and the touch sensor is detected, it is highly likely that the player is playing the game eagerly. It can increase the gross profit of the store.

  On the other hand, when the current start memory number is 1 (the result of A0401 is “Y”), the game control device 600 next determines whether or not the touch sensor is detected (A0405).

  When the touch sensor is detected (the result of A0405 is “Y”), the third variation pattern selection group information is set as the variation pattern selection information. In the third variation pattern selection group information, a variation pattern having a slightly longer variation time is defined as shown in FIGS. When the start memory number is 1 and there is a touch sensor detection, it is highly possible that the player is eagerly continuing the game. It is possible to facilitate the accumulation of numbers.

  When the touch sensor is not detected (the result of A0405 is “N”), fourth variation pattern selection group information is set as variation pattern selection information. In the fourth variation pattern selection group information, a variation pattern having a long variation time is defined as shown in FIGS. When the start memory number is 1 and the touch sensor is not detected, it is highly probable that the player is trying to stop the game. The person can be detained.

  When determining whether or not the firing stop switch 110 is operated and setting the variation pattern selection group information, as shown in FIG. 104B, a process for determining whether or not a firing stop switch command has been received (A0408 and A0409) is added.

(Effect of 5th Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern of the variation display game selected according to the start memory number and the ON / OFF of the touch switch signal is selected. Therefore, a player who is likely to stop the game can be retained, and a player who is likely to stop is able to return to the launch operation at an early stage. In addition, for a player who is likely to play an ambitious game, the game speed can be increased to increase the gross profit of the game store.

(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
In the modification of the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern selection group information is set more finely by increasing the number of patterns set in accordance with the number of starting memories than in the fifth embodiment. Specifically, the variation pattern selection group information set when the number of holds is four is set to be different from the variation pattern selection group information set when the number of holds is two or three.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of normal time variation pattern selection group information table setting processing according to a modification of the fifth embodiment of this invention.

  In the present modification, step A0410, which is a process for determining whether or not the start memory number is 4, is added to the normal time variation pattern selection group information table setting process (FIG. 104A) of the fifth embodiment. . By adding such processing, the first variation pattern selection group information or the second variation pattern selection group information is set only when the number of holds is four, and when the number of holds is two or three, the third variation pattern selection group information is set. Variation pattern selection group information is set (see FIG. 108).

(Effect of Modification of Fifth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the modification of the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern selection group information is set separately for the case where the number of reservations is four and the case where the number of reservations is two or three. The variation pattern according to the game posture of the player is set, and the operation of the gaming machine can be further enhanced.

(Sixth embodiment)
In the sixth embodiment, when the touch switch signal is branched in the launch control board, the output direction of the signal is unidirectional so that noise does not enter the launch control circuit from the connection point to the game control device 600. A configuration to be regulated will be described.

[Customer waiting demonstration process]
Next, details of the customer waiting demonstration process (B1405) in the above-described normal game process (FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a customer waiting demonstration process according to the sixth embodiment of this invention.

  First, the video control microcomputer 720 determines whether or not a customer waiting demo command (customer waiting demo start information) has been received (B1801). Note that the customer waiting demo command is set in the special process in FIG. 38 and is sent from the game control device 600 via the main control microcomputer 710 when the number of holdings is zero and the touch switch 120 is not detected (see FIG. 38). B1014). When the customer waiting demonstration command is received (result of B1801 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is set (B1802). If the customer waiting demo command has not been received (result of B1801 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo end command (customer waiting demo end information) has been received (B1803). The customer waiting demo end command is set in the customer waiting demo return processing of FIG. 19 when the touch switch 120 is detected, and is sent from the game control device 600 via the main control microcomputer 710 (B1014). ).

  When the customer waiting demonstration end command is received (result of B1803 is “Y”), the video control microcomputer 720 ends the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (B1804) and clears the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer (B1805). ). When the customer waiting demonstration end command has not been received (the result of B1803 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is checked (B1806).

  Next, the video control microcomputer 720 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is at time t1 (that is, whether or not time t1 has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demonstration command) (B1807). When the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is time t1 (the result of B1807 is “Y”), it is determined whether the luminous intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 21 and the panel decoration device 760 is “high” (B1808). ). When the luminous intensity of the LED is “high” (result of B1808 is “Y”), the luminous intensity (command value) of the LED is set to “medium” via the main control microcomputer 710 (B1809). The process ends. When the luminous intensity of the LED is not “high” (the result of B1808 is “N”), the current customer waiting demonstration process is terminated.

  Note that the video control microcomputer 720 sends command values to the panel decoration LED control circuit 741 that controls the panel decoration device 760 and the frame decoration LED control circuit 742 that controls the frame decoration device 21 (for example, currents to be supplied to LEDs and duty commands). Value) is acquired from the main control microcomputer 710, and it can be determined whether the luminous intensity of the LED is “high”, “medium”, or “low”. In the present embodiment, the light intensity (command value) of the LED is set to three values of high, medium, and low, and is set to “high” in a normal state other than the customer waiting state, but is not limited thereto.

  If the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is not at time t1 (result of B1807 is “N”), the video control microcomputer 720 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is at time t2 (that is, receiving the customer waiting demonstration command). Whether or not the time t2 has elapsed since then (B1810). When the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is at time t2 (result of B1810 is “Y”), BGM such as various melody is turned off (B1811), and this process is terminated. The video control microcomputer 720 controls the sound source LSI 705 via the main control microcomputer 710 to turn off the BGM reproduced from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b (that is, the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b). Set the volume to zero). Here, the BGM is switched on and off, but for example, the volume level of the BGM may be controlled.

  When the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is not time t2 (result of B1810 is “N”), the video control microcomputer 720 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is time t3 (that is, receiving the customer waiting demonstration command). Whether time t3 has elapsed since then) is determined (B1812). When the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is time t3 (result of B1807 is “Y”), display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is started on the variable display device 35 (B1813). Thereafter, it is determined whether the luminous intensity of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 21 and the panel decoration device 760 is “medium” (B1814). When the intensity of the LED is “medium” (the result of B1814 is “Y”), the intensity (command value) of the LED is set to “low” via the main control microcomputer 710 (B1815). End the waiting demo process. If the luminous intensity of the LED is not “medium” (the result of B1814 is “N”), the current customer waiting demonstration process is terminated.

  When the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is not at time t3 (result of B1812 is “N”), the video control microcomputer 720 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is at time t4 (that is, receiving the customer waiting demonstration command). Whether or not the time t4 has elapsed since then (B1816). When the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is time t4 (result of B1816 is “Y”), the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is ended (B1817), the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is reset (B1818), End the waiting demo process. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is not time t4 (result of B1816 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration process is terminated as it is.

  Further, in the customer waiting demonstration process of FIG. 109, the effect control device 700 receives the customer waiting demonstration command, and then sets the luminous intensity (or brightness and brightness) of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 21 and the panel decoration device 760 to “high”. , “Middle” and “low” in a stepwise manner, and correspondingly, the luminous intensity (or luminance and brightness) of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is gradually increased to “high”, “medium”, Decrease to “low”. The state where the luminous intensity is “low” is a waiting state (power saving state) of the LED of the frame decoration device 21 and the panel decoration device 760 and the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35. Further, the luminous intensity of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 21 and the board decoration device 760 and the luminous intensity of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 are an example of a decoration aspect of the gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control device 700 has a decoration aspect. Then, the position of the movable accessory may be gradually returned to the waiting state for the customer (initial position).

  Also, the customer waiting demo process of FIG. 109 may be executed by the main control microcomputer 710 via the video control microcomputer 720 as part of the customer waiting process (B1110 of FIG. 82) instead of the video control microcomputer 720. It is.

[Time Chart 10]
FIG. 110 is a time chart illustrating an example of a control result of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. This example shows a case where the special figure variation display game is finished after the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15 (after the touch switch 120 is turned off).

  At the time t0 when the variation of the special symbol (the special symbol variation display game) is finished, the special symbol usual processing (FIG. 38), the special figure reservation number (that is, the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number) is 0 The touch switch 120 is in an off state (touch switch signal input is not detected) (results of A3801 and A3806 are “Y”, and result of A3812 is “N”). Therefore, the condition for shifting to the customer waiting state (customer waiting demo state) is established, the customer waiting demo flag is turned on (A3813), and the effect control device 700 receives the customer waiting demo command (A3814, A3815). .

  At time t1 when a predetermined time (t1-t0) has elapsed since the customer waiting demo flag was turned on at time t0, the brightness of the decorative LED changes from “high” to “medium” (B1809). At time t2, the volume of the speaker is set to zero and BGM is turned off (B1811). At time t3 when a predetermined time T has elapsed after the customer waiting demo flag is turned on at time t0, the brightness of the decorative LED changes from “medium” to “low” (B1815). Also, at time t3, the waiting display demo is started by displaying the customer waiting demonstration screen for waiting on the variable display device 35 (customer waiting demonstration screen on) (B1813).

  At time t4, the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is finished (B1817), and the display is switched to the normal screen on which the stop result of the previous decorative special figure variation display game displayed before the customer waiting demonstration is displayed. It is done. Thereafter, when the BGM is already turned off and the luminous intensity of the LED is “low” and the predetermined time T has elapsed, the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is started again on the variable display device 35 (customer waiting demonstration screen on) (B1813). . In other words, the customer waiting demo screen and the normal screen are switched as the predetermined time elapses until the customer waiting demo end command is received.

[Time Chart 11]
FIG. 111 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. This example shows a case where the player continues to operate the operation unit 15 in a slump state (malfunction state) in which there is no winning of a game ball at the starting port for a long time even though the game ball is being fired during the game. Show.

  At time t0 when the change of the special symbol (the special figure change display game) is finished, the special figure holding number (that is, the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number) is 0 in the special figure normal processing (FIG. 38). Even in the slump state, the touch switch 120 remains on (detected) (results of A3801, A3806, and A3812 are “Y”). Therefore, the customer waiting demo flag remains off, and the effect control device 700 does not receive the customer waiting demo command. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is not set, and nothing is performed in the customer waiting demonstration process of FIG. When there is a winning game ball at the start opening (the start opening switch is turned on), a special symbol change (special display change display game) starts and escapes from the slump state.

[Time Chart 12]
FIG. 112 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. This example shows a case where the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15 (the touch switch 120 is turned off) in a slump state where there is no winning at the start of the game ball for a long time during the game.

  At the time when the special symbol change (special figure change display game) is completed, the special figure hold number (that is, the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number) is 0 in the special figure normal processing (FIG. 38). In the slump state, the touch switch 120 remains on (the results of A3801, A3806, and A3812 are “Y”). Therefore, the customer waiting demo flag remains off, and the effect control device 700 does not receive the customer waiting demo command.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15 at time t0, the special figure holding number (that is, the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number) is 0 in the special figure normal processing (FIG. 38). The touch switch 120 is turned off (results of A3801 and A3806 are “Y”, and result of A3812 is “N”). Therefore, the condition for shifting to the customer waiting state (customer waiting demo state) is established, the customer waiting demo flag is turned on (A3813), and the effect control device 700 receives the customer waiting demo command (A3814, A3815). . Then, from time t0 to time t3, the same control results as those in the time chart 10 of FIG. 110 are obtained.

  Thereafter, when the player starts operating the operation unit 15 during the customer waiting demonstration (while the customer waiting demonstration screen is being displayed) and the touch switch 120 is turned on, the customer waiting demonstration is performed in the customer waiting demonstration return process of FIG. The middle flag is turned off (cleared) (A1904), and a customer waiting demonstration end command is transmitted from the game control device 600 (A1905, A1906). Then, in the customer waiting demo process (FIG. 109), when the video control microcomputer 720 of the effect control device 700 receives the customer waiting demo end command (the result of B1803 is “Y”), the display of the customer waiting demo screen is ended. (The customer waiting demonstration screen is off) (B1804).

[Time Chart 13]
FIG. 113 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. In this example, after the player stops the operation of the operation unit 15 (after the touch switch 120 is turned off), the special figure variation display game is finished, and then the player starts the operation of the operation unit 15. Show. From time t0 to time t3, the same control results as those in the time chart 10 of FIG. 110 are obtained.

  Thereafter, when the player starts operating the operation unit 15 during the customer waiting demonstration (while the customer waiting demonstration screen is being displayed) and the touch switch 120 is turned on, the customer waiting demonstration is performed in the customer waiting demonstration return process of FIG. The middle flag is turned off (cleared) (A1904), and a customer waiting demonstration end command is transmitted from the game control device 600 (A1905, A1906). At the same time, the BGM is turned on and the brightness of the decorative LED returns to “high”. In the customer waiting demo return processing of FIG. 19, a processing step of turning on BGM and preparing and setting a command for setting the luminous intensity of the decoration LED to “high” may be added after A1906. Then, in the customer waiting demo process (FIG. 109), when the video control microcomputer 720 of the effect control device 700 receives the customer waiting demo end command (the result of B1803 is “Y”), the display of the customer waiting demo screen is ended. (The customer waiting demonstration screen is off) (B1804). After that, there is a game ball winning at the start opening (the start opening switch is turned on), and a special symbol change (special figure change display game) starts.

  In FIG. 114, a conventional gaming machine that performs control to end the customer waiting demo as soon as the special symbol variation starts, without detecting / non-detecting (ON / OFF) of the touch switch 120 as a condition for ending / starting the customer waiting demo. An example of During the customer waiting demo (while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed), even if the player starts operating the operation unit 15 and the touch switch 120 is turned on, the customer waiting demo (displaying the customer waiting demo screen) ends. Without waiting, when there is a game ball winning at the start opening (the start opening switch is turned on), and the special symbol change (special display change display game) starts, the customer waiting demo ends.

[Time Chart 14]
FIG. 115 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the time shown in FIG. 113 is only a special effect when the player starts operating the operation unit 15 and the touch switch 120 is turned on during the customer waiting demonstration (while the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed). This is different from the chart 13.

  If the player starts operating the operation unit 15 during the customer waiting demonstration after the time t3 (while the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed) and the touch switch 120 is turned on, the customer waiting demonstration flag is turned off (A1904). The display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is turned off (B1804). Thereafter, there is a winning of a game ball at the start opening (the start opening switch is turned on), and a special effect is performed on the change display device 35 until the special symbol change (special view change display game) starts.

  In order to do this, as shown in FIG. 116, in the customer waiting demonstration process (FIG. 109), the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is terminated (B1804), and the customer waiting demonstration monitoring timer is cleared (B1805). A processing step (B1819) for starting is added.

[Special production 1]
FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an effect example of special effects performed by the effect control device 700 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 117 (E)-(H) are illustrated in FIGS. 117 (A)-(D). It is a figure which shows the conventional production corresponding to ().

  In the present embodiment, detection / non-detection of the touch switch 120 is included in the condition for ending / starting the customer waiting demo. For this reason, when the player starts operating the operation unit 15 and the touch switch 120 is turned on while the customer waiting demonstration screen (image) is being displayed on the variable display device 35 (FIG. 117A), the effect control is performed. The device 700 ends the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen on the variable display device 35 and starts a special effect (FIG. 117 (B)). The special effect is executed in a display mode (display content) corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the special effect (that is, information related to the gaming machine 1). In the present embodiment, in the special effect, an instruction on how to hit (the launch mode of the ball launcher) corresponding to the game state is displayed, but a game state such as a probability variation game state may be directly displayed.

  For example, if the gaming state of the gaming machine is a probabilistic gaming state or a short-time gaming state at the start of the special production, as a special production, a display prompting the player to make a right stroke (a notification notifying that the right stroke is advantageous) ) Is performed in the variable display device 35 (FIG. 117 (B)). When the player selects right-handed by operating the operation unit 15, the variable display device 35 displays a hold on the second start memory (special figure 2 hold) by winning the second start winning opening 38 (see FIG. 2). B1404) (FIG. 117C). Here, a state is shown in which a plurality of game balls are continuously awarded to the movable member 38a in the open state. Then, the customer waiting demonstration screen is ended based on the winning of the second start memory, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed (FIG. 117 (D)). At the time when the customer waiting demonstration screen is finished, the stop symbols in the previous decorative special figure variation display game are displayed, and from this state, the current decorative special figure variation display game is started. 117 (A) to 117 (D) show the case where the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the short-time state, but when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, a display for prompting left-handed as a special effect is displayed. You may do it.

  On the other hand, in the conventional example, since the detection / non-detection (on / off) of the touch switch 120 is not included in the condition for ending / starting the customer waiting demonstration, the touch switch 120 is not displayed during the customer waiting demonstration (FIG. 117 (E)). Even in the on state, the effect control device 700 continues to display the customer waiting demo screen on the variable display device 35, and the customer waiting demo state continues (FIG. 117 (F)). When the player selects left-handed as usual by operating the operation unit 15, the variable display device 35 displays a hold display related to the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) by winning the first start winning opening 37. (B1404) (FIG. 117 (G)). Then, based on the first start memory, the decoration special figure variation display game is executed (FIG. 117 (H)). For this reason, the player cannot appropriately select a hitting method (launch mode of the ball launching device) according to the gaming state, and the interest of the game is impaired. In addition, in the gaming machine in which the distribution of the execution contents is set to be advantageous to the player in the second starting memory than in the first starting memory, the interest of the game is greatly impaired.

[Time Chart 15]
FIG. 118 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. This example shows a case where a special effect is performed when a slump state (unsatisfied state) in which a winning at the start opening does not occur for a long time during a game occurs.

  The touch switch 120 is turned on in the slump state even when the special symbol change (special figure change display game) is finished and the special figure hold number (that is, the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number) is 0. The state remains (the results of A3801, A3806, and A3812 are “Y”). Therefore, the customer waiting demo flag remains off, and the production control device 700 does not receive the customer waiting demo command and does not execute the customer waiting demo.

  However, when a predetermined time T elapses after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation display game) ends, the effect control device 700 performs a special effect in the variation display device 35 instead of displaying the customer waiting demonstration screen. . When there is a winning game ball at the starting port (the starting port switch is turned on) and the player exits the slump state, the production control device 700 starts a special symbol variation (special diagram variation display game) in the variation display device 35. The special production ends. Therefore, when the touch switch 120 is in the ON state (detected) in the special figure routine process of FIG. 38 (the result of A3812 is “Y”), the game control device 600 prepares and sets a special effect command. To do. Then, the effect control device 700 that has received the special effect command performs the special effect after the predetermined time T has elapsed. Here, the predetermined time T is the same as the predetermined time T in the time chart 10 of FIG. 110, but may be different.

[Special production 2]
FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an effect example of a special effect performed by the effect control device 700 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and FIGS. 119 (E) to 119 (H) illustrate the control results of the timing chart 1. FIG. FIG. The special effect will be described in comparison with the control result of the timing chart 1.

  In the control result of the time chart 15, the touch switch 120 remains in the on state even when the change of the special symbol is completed and the special figure holding number is 0 (FIG. 119 (A)). After the elapse of the predetermined time T, the special effect starts on the variable display device 35 (FIG. 119 (B)). Thereafter, as a special effect, the display content on the variable display device 35 changes with time (FIGS. 119 (C) and (D)). Thereafter, when there is a winning game ball at the start opening, the variation display device 35 starts the variation of the special symbol (the special variation display game) (FIG. 119 (E)).

  On the other hand, in the control result of the time chart 10, when the change of the special symbol is finished, the special figure holding number is 0 and the touch switch 120 is in the OFF state (FIG. 119 (F)). At time t1, the luminous intensity of the decoration (LED, variable display device 35) changes from “high” to “medium” (FIG. 119 (G)). At time t2, the volume of the speaker is set to zero and BGM is turned off (FIG. 119 (H)). At time t3, the luminous intensity of the decoration (LED, variable display device 35) changes from “medium” to “low” (FIG. 119 (I)), and the variable display device 35 displays a customer waiting demo screen. Is displayed. Thereafter, when there is a winning game ball at the start opening, the variation display device 35 starts the variation of the special symbol (the special variation display game) (FIG. 119 (J)).

  In the special performance, the display content, the content of the dialogue, and the appearance item (the catched item here) change with the passage of time from the start of the special performance to the winning of the starting opening (starting winning). As shown in FIGS. 120A to 120C, the expectation level of the probabilistic gaming state is different for each special effect content (for example, display content, dialogue content, appearance item, etc.), and the probability state (high probability) State, low probability state). That is, the probability (distribution rate) that the display C appears in the case of the probability variation gaming state is increased, and the probability that the display C appears in the case of not being the probability variation gaming state is decreased. The probability (distribution rate) that the display B appears in the case of the probability variation gaming state is made medium, and the probability that the display B appears in the case of not being the probability variation gaming state is made medium. The probability (distribution rate) that the display A appears in the case of the probability variation gaming state is lowered, and the probability that the display A appears in the case of not being the probability variation gaming state is increased. In particular, in the latent probability changing state without ordinary power support, if the degree of expectation of the probability changing gaming state (high probability state) is notified according to the contents of the special performance, the interest of the game is enhanced. It should be noted that the content of the special effect may be changed to one with a high expectation level of the probability variation gaming state with the passage of time.

[Time Chart 16]
FIG. 121 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. In this example, if the touch switch 120 is turned off without detecting a winning at the start winning opening during execution of the special effect, the customer waiting demonstration flag is turned on and the special effect ends. That is, as a special effect end condition, the special effect may be ended on condition that the customer waiting demo flag is turned on in addition to the start of the change of the special symbol as shown in FIG.

(Effect of 6th Embodiment)
As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, the launch control device 200 (launch control means) performs control to launch a game ball toward the game area. The launch unit 140 (launch operation means) launches a launch operation unit 15 that can be operated by the player from the outside, a touch switch 120 (operation detection means) that can detect an operation to the launch operation unit 15, and a game ball. And a firing motor 240 (launching device) that is operated in the operation. When the firing control device 200 receives a touch switch signal (operation detection signal) sent from the firing unit 140 based on detection of an operation by the touch switch 120, the firing control device 200 activates the firing motor 240 and is sent from the firing unit 140. The touch switch signal can be branched and output to the game control device 600 (game control means). In the middle of the circuit that outputs the touch switch signal to the game control device 600, a restricting means (for example, a driver circuit 208e) that restricts the direction of the signal to one direction is arranged. For this reason, even if noise occurs in the cable between the launch control device 200 and the game control device 600, the launch control circuit 202 (launch control unit) of the launch control device 200 can be prevented from causing a malfunction. Therefore, the influence of noise on the launch control of the game ball can be reduced or prevented, and malfunction of the launch motor 240 can also be prevented.

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the firing control device 200 (launching control means) includes a driver 204 having a plurality of terminals connected to a unidirectional transistor. In response to receiving the touch switch signal, the firing control device 200 outputs a control signal for the firing motor 240 via the driver 204 to operate the firing motor 240. And the launch control apparatus 200 uses the terminals 5 and 12 other than the terminals 1-4 and 13-16 used for sending the control signal of the launch motor 240 among the plurality of terminals of the driver 204. A touch switch signal is output to 600. For this reason, the empty terminal of the driver 204 can be utilized, and noise intrusion from the game control device 600 side can be reduced or prevented without increasing the number of parts.

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the driver 204 includes the constant voltage diode 213 (suppression circuit) that suppresses the driving voltage of the firing motor 240 to a predetermined voltage. The touch switch signal has a voltage level that does not exceed a predetermined voltage. Therefore, a simple driver circuit can be used.

  According to the sixth embodiment, the variable display device 35 (display device) can display a variable display game. The effect control device 700 (effect control means) performs display control of the variable display device 35 based on command information from the game control device 600 (game control means). The customer waiting demo information transmitting means of the game control device 600 uses, as the command information, a customer waiting demo command (customer waiting) that can start control for shifting the display mode on the variable display device 35 (display device) to the customer waiting demo state. Demo start information) can be transmitted to the production control device 700 based on the establishment of the condition (predetermined condition) for shifting to the customer waiting demo state. The customer waiting demo information transmitting means determines that the transition condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied at least by not receiving the touch switch signal. Therefore, even if the player is playing and the touch switch signal (operation detection signal) is received, it is possible to prevent the transition to the customer waiting demo state. Thereby, the fall of a player's interest can be prevented. In addition, since the transition condition can be determined using the touch switch signal from the existing touch switch 120, there is no need to provide another special sensor.

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the effect control device 700 receives the customer waiting demo command from the game control device 600 and then the variable display device 35 when a predetermined time T (second predetermined period) has elapsed. The display mode in the (display device) is shifted to the customer waiting demo state, and the decoration mode of the gaming machine is gradually changed to the customer waiting state (for example, the power saving state) before the predetermined time T (second predetermined period) elapses. To move to. If the decoration mode of a gaming machine shifts from the normal state to the waiting state for the customer immediately, it will suddenly awaken, so by gradually shifting to the waiting state for the customer, the surroundings of the gaming machine The feeling of discomfort for the players in the can be eliminated.

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the customer waiting demo information transmitting means of the game control device 600 transmits the touch switch signal after the customer waiting demo start information is transmitted based on the establishment of the transition condition (predetermined condition). If received, a customer waiting demo end command (customer waiting demo end information) for terminating the customer waiting demo state is transmitted to the effect control device 700 as command information. When receiving the customer waiting demonstration end command, the effect control device 700 ends the display for the customer waiting demonstration (the customer waiting demonstration screen or the customer waiting demonstration image) on the variable display device 35 (decorative display device). Accordingly, when the player starts playing during the customer waiting demo, that is, when a touch switch signal (operation detection signal) is received, the customer waiting demo state is promptly terminated to return from the customer waiting demo state. Can do. Thereby, the fall of a player's interest can be prevented.

  Also, according to the sixth embodiment, the production control device 700 is based on winning at the start winning ports 37 and 38 after the customer waiting demo information transmission means transmits a customer waiting demo end command to the production control device 700. Until the variable display game is performed, the variable display device 35 executes a special effect capable of notifying the player of information related to the gaming machine 1. The information related to the gaming machine 1 is, for example, how to hit the game state or the game state. Therefore, before the game fluctuation display game is started, information on the current game state can be known, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, according to the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 1 has a first start winning opening 37 (first start winning area) as a start winning area and a specific gaming state (for example, a probability changing gaming state or a short-time gaming state). ), A second start winning area (second start winning opening 38) provided with an electric accessory that makes it easy for the game ball to win a prize. The second start winning area is arranged at a position where a winning can be achieved only in a predetermined launch mode of the game ball (right-handed in this embodiment). The effect control device 700 performs an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the specific gaming state as a special effect. Therefore, before the start of the variable display game, the player who has grasped whether or not a specific gaming state is in a special effect can operate the firing operation unit 15 to adjust the firing mode suitable for the current gaming state. .

  It is to be noted that, in a gaming machine having a gaming property that allows a left-handed game to be performed normally and a right-handed game to be performed during a specific gaming state (for example, a probable gaming state or a short-time gaming state), When starting the game, the customer waiting demo screen may not be released until the start winning prize. In this case, the player does not know at the start of the game whether or not the current game state is in a specific state. When the start winning prize is generated and the customer waiting demo screen is finished, the current waiting state is returned from the customer waiting demo screen so that the current game state can be known. However, in the case of a specific gaming state, the player knows that he was making a left turn in vain until the end of the customer waiting demo screen, and the interest of the game is reduced at the end of the customer waiting demo screen. There is a fear. Therefore, when the operation of the launch operation unit 15 (operation unit) is detected by the touch switch signal and the customer waiting demonstration screen is ended, the player can quickly recognize the current gaming state, and the gaming state at an early stage. The launch operation unit 15 can be operated according to the above. For this reason, the fall of a player's interest can be prevented.

(Seventh embodiment)
The seventh embodiment relates to a special figure routine process. Note that in the seventh embodiment, a description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is omitted.

[Special figure processing 2]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure normal process (special figure normal process 2) (step A3109 in FIG. 31) according to the seventh embodiment of this invention. The game control device 600 performs the same processes as A8101 to A8110 and the processes from A3801 to A3810 of the special figure routine process (FIG. 38) according to the first embodiment. Next, the game control device 600 already has a waiting-for-customer demonstration when the number of special figure holds (that is, the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number) is 0 (the result of A3801 and A3806 is “Y”). It is determined whether the middle flag is on (A8111).

  When the waiting customer demonstration flag is on (result of A8111 is “Y”), the game control device 600 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (FIG. 39) (A8120). If the customer waiting demo flag is off (the result of A8111 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo start timer has already been set (A8112). When the customer waiting demonstration start timer is not set (the result of A8112 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the touch switch 120 is detected (A8113). When the touch switch 120 is detected (result of A8113 is “Y”), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A8120). When the touch switch 120 is not detected (the result of A813 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration start timer is set (A8114), and then the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A8120).

  On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration start timer is set (the result of A8112 is “Y”), whether or not the customer waiting demonstration start timer becomes zero, that is, after the touch switch 120 is no longer detected, the customer waiting It is determined whether or not a predetermined time T4 determined by the demonstration start timer has elapsed (A8115). When the customer waiting demonstration start timer is not zero (the result of A8115 is “N”), the current special figure routine processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration start timer becomes zero (the result of A8115 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration flag area is set to ON and saved (A8116). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (A8117), and a command setting process is executed (A8118). Next, the customer waiting demonstration start timer is cleared (A8119), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A8120).

  For this reason, the customer waiting demonstration flag is turned on and the customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted to the effect control device 700 when the predetermined time T4 has elapsed after the special figure hold count becomes zero and the touch switch 120 is no longer detected. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting demonstration from being started even though the player is in the seat of the gaming machine with the intention of continuing the game.

[Resume waiting process 2]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a customer waiting demo return process (customer waiting demo return process 2) (step A1610 in FIG. 16) according to the seventh embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the touch switch 120 is detected (A8201). If the touch switch 120 is not detected (the result of A8201 is “N”), the current customer waiting demo return process is terminated. When the touch switch 120 is detected (the result of A8201 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo flag area (part of RWM) is checked to determine whether or not the customer waiting demo flag is set to ON. (A8202, A8203). When the customer waiting demo flag is on (result of A8203 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A8204), a customer waiting demo end command is prepared (A8205), and the command is set. The command setting process is performed (A8206).

  On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration flag is off (the result of A8203 is “N”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration start timer is set (A8207). When the customer waiting demonstration start timer is set (the result of A8207 is “Y”), the customer waiting demonstration start timer is cleared (A8208), and the current customer waiting demonstration return processing is terminated. If the customer waiting demo start timer is not set (the result of A8207 is “N”), the current customer waiting demo return process is terminated.

[Time Chart 17]
FIG. 124 is a time chart illustrating an example of a result of the control according to the seventh embodiment of this invention.

  When the special symbol change (special figure change display game) is completed, the special figure hold number (that is, the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number) is 0 in the special figure normal processing 2 (FIG. 122). The touch switch 120 is in an off state (no detection) (the results of A8101 and A8106 are “Y”, and the result of A8113 is “N”). Therefore, a customer waiting demonstration start timer is set (A8114). However, if the touch switch 120 is detected before the customer waiting demonstration start timer becomes zero, that is, before the predetermined time T4 elapses after the touch switch 120 is no longer detected, the result of A8201 is “Y ]) (Touch switch ON), the customer waiting demo start flag is still OFF, so the customer waiting demo start timer is cleared (A8208).

  The fact that the touch switch 120 has been detected means that the player intends to continue the game and operates the operation unit 15 to operate the ball launching device. When there is a winning game ball at the start port, the variation display device 35 starts the variation of the special symbol. Thereafter, when the touch switch 120 is turned off (non-detection) and the variation of the special symbol is completed, the customer waiting demonstration start timer is set again (A8114). When the touch switch 120 is in the off state, the customer waiting demonstration start timer becomes zero (that is, when the predetermined time T4 elapses after the detection of the touch switch 120 is terminated and the variation of the special symbol ends), the customer waiting demonstration. The middle flag is set to ON (A8116), and the luminous intensity of the decoration LED gradually decreases in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the BGM is turned OFF.

(Effect of 7th Embodiment)
As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, the customer waiting demo information transmitting means of the game control device 600 is set to the predetermined time T4 (first predetermined time) after the condition for transitioning to the customer waiting demo state (predetermined condition) is satisfied. When the (period) elapses, a customer waiting demo command (customer waiting demo start information) is transmitted to the effect control device 700. Even if the touch switch 120 is not detected, the player may be willing to continue the game and may still be seated in a chair installed in front of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, after waiting for a predetermined time T4 after the transition condition to the customer waiting demo state (customer waiting state) is satisfied, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted to the effect control device 700, so that the player is seated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 1 from shifting to the customer waiting demo state.

(Modification of the seventh embodiment)
As a modification of the seventh embodiment, a transition to a power saving screen will be described. Specifically, after the customer waiting demo flag is set to ON, when a predetermined time T elapses, a customer waiting demo screen is displayed, and further, the predetermined time elapses without any operation input of the gaming machine, thereby saving power. When the transition timing elapses, a power saving screen is displayed.

[Time Chart 18]
FIG. 125 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In this example, when the touch switch 120 is OFF and the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the customer waiting demonstration flag is turned ON, and the power saving state is set after a predetermined period.

  At time t0 when the touch switch is OFF, the special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display game) ends, and the customer waiting demonstration flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the decoration light intensity is set from high to medium at time t1 when the predetermined period has elapsed, and BGM is set OFF at time t2 when the predetermined period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, at time t3 when a predetermined period has elapsed, the customer waiting demonstration screen is set to ON, and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed. Further, the decoration light intensity is set from medium to low. When a predetermined period (demo time A) elapses from the start of the customer waiting demonstration screen (power saving transition timing), the power saving screen is displayed. In the power saving screen, for example, the screen is displayed in black, and the power consumption for displaying the screen becomes the lowest level.

  Thereafter, the power saving screen is set to OFF at a time t4 (t0) after a predetermined period has elapsed. After time t4, for example, a previous special symbol stop screen is displayed. Thereafter, at the time t3 when the predetermined period has elapsed, the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed again.

  In this example, the touch switch 120 has been described as being in the OFF state. However, even when the touch switch 120 is in the ON state, when the special symbol changes and the predetermined period elapses, the customer standby state is changed to the power saving state. And migrate.

  As described above, when the operation state does not change and the change of the special symbol stops and the predetermined period elapses, the customer waiting demonstration screen and the power saving screen are alternately displayed and the power consumption of the gaming machine 1 Reduce.

[Time Chart 19]
FIG. 126 is a time chart showing an example of the control results of the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (particularly the video control microcomputer 720) according to the modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In this example, after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the touch switch 120 is turned off, and the power saving state is entered after a predetermined period.

  At time t0 when the special symbol variation (special symbol variation display game) ends, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set to ON. Thereafter, when the touch switch is turned off, the customer waiting demonstration screen is set to ON, and the decorative light intensity is set from high to medium. Also, BGM is set to OFF (time t1).

  Thereafter, at time t2 when a predetermined period has elapsed from time t1 when the OFF state of the touch switch is detected, the decorative light intensity is set from medium to low. Since the player may still be seated even after releasing the launch handle, the touch switch 120 is turned off and the decoration light intensity is set to low immediately to completely shift to the waiting state. Rather than end, it will be shifted to the waiting state in stages.

  Thereafter, at time t3 when a predetermined period (demo time B) has elapsed from time t1, the customer waiting demonstration screen is set to OFF, and the power saving screen is set to ON. Here, the power saving screen is started after the lapse of the demo time B after the touch switch 120 is turned off. However, the power saving screen is saved depending on which of the demo time B or the power saving transition timing is reached, whichever comes first. The power screen starts.

  Thereafter, at time t4 (t0) when the predetermined period has elapsed, the power saving screen is set to OFF, and the previous special symbol stop screen is displayed. Thereafter, at the time t3 when the predetermined period has elapsed, the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed again.

  As described above, when the touch-off state is set, the customer waiting screen is displayed after a short period of time, and the power saving mode is started earlier, so that the power consumption corresponding to the waiting time can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the modification of the seventh embodiment, when the operation state of the touch switch 120 does not change and a predetermined period elapses after the change of the special symbol stops, the customer waiting screen is displayed. . Further, when the touch switch 120 is turned off after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the customer waiting screen is displayed after a short period of time. When the customer standby screen is displayed, the BGM is set to OFF and the decoration light intensity is set to low, and the power saving mode is continued while alternately displaying the customer standby screen and the power saving screen. Power consumption can be suppressed. In particular, by monitoring the state of the touch switch 120, it is possible to determine that the standby state has been entered earlier than in the conventional gaming machine, and to shift to the power saving mode earlier than in the conventional gaming machine. it can.

(Eighth embodiment)
The eighth embodiment relates to the details (button effect process) of the effect button input process (B1009) in the first main process (FIG. 81) of the effect control device 700. Note that in the eighth embodiment, description of the same configurations as the sixth and seventh embodiments is omitted.

[Produce button input process (button effect process)]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the effect button input process according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main control microcomputer 710 checks the customer waiting demo flag area (B2001). Next, it is determined whether or not an effect button SW (switch) 751 for detecting that the effect button 17 has been operated is on (detected) (B2002). If the effect button SW (switch) 751 is off (not detected) (the result of B2002 is “N”), the current effect button input process is terminated. When the effect button SW (switch) 751 is on (detected) (result of B2002 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration screen is being displayed on the variable display device 35 (B2003). When the customer waiting demo flag is set to ON, or when the customer waiting demo screen for customer waiting is being displayed when the predetermined time T has elapsed since the customer waiting demo flag was turned on I can judge. If the customer waiting demonstration screen is not being displayed (the result of B2003 is “N”), the current effect button input process is terminated.

  When the customer waiting demonstration screen is being displayed (the result of B2003 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 selects or sets the contents of the button effect waiting for the customer in the variable display device 35 (B2004). The button effect may be a predetermined effect, or may be selected at random by lottery or distribution. Moreover, when selecting an effect by lottery or distribution, the appearance rate (selection rate, winning rate or distribution rate) of the effect may be varied according to the expected degree of the probability variation gaming state. By these, it is possible to urge the customers of the game shop to play a game with a gaming machine.

  Next, the main control microcomputer 710 prepares an effect command to cause the video control microcomputer 720 to execute the selected button effect. The main control microcomputer 710 edits the effect command and transmits it to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720 in the effect command editing process (B1014). In this way, when the player operates the effect button 17 during the customer waiting demonstration, the button display is executed in the variable display device 35.

[Waiting for button production 1]
FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an effect example of a button effect while waiting for a customer according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention (button effect 1 while waiting for a customer).

  When the operation of the effect button 17 is detected during the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (FIG. 128A) on the variable display device 35 (B2002), a character image is displayed as the button effect. As shown in FIGS. 128 (B)-(D), the character image to be displayed may be randomly selected from a plurality of character images (here, seafood) by lottery or distribution, or the character to be displayed. The image selection rate (selection rate, winning rate or distribution rate) may be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability changing gaming state. In addition, the character images may be displayed in a predetermined order for each operation of the effect button 17, or the same predetermined effect (here, an effect that the fish character jumps (every time, every time the effect button 17 is operated). 128 (B)) may be performed The character image appears for a predetermined period after detecting the operation of the effect button 17 and returns to the state of the original customer waiting demonstration screen (FIG. 128 (E)).

[Waiting for waiting buttons 2]
FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating another effect example (button waiting for customer 2 effect) of a button effect while waiting for a customer according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.

  When an operation of the effect button 17 is detected during display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (FIG. 129 (A)) (B2002), the background image changes as the button effect. As shown in FIGS. 129 (B)-(D), the background image to be displayed may be randomly selected from a plurality of background images by lottery or distribution, or the selection ratio (selection of the background image to be displayed) (Rate, winning rate or allocation rate) may be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state. Further, the background image may be displayed in a predetermined order for each operation of the effect button 17, or the same predetermined background image may be displayed every time the operation button 17 is operated. The background image may not be changed until the next operation of the effect button 17.

[Special production 3]
FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an example of special effects performed by the effect control apparatus 700 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Screens (A1)-(A4) show screen transitions when the touch switch is turned on 120 while the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed. Screens (B1)-(B4) are touch switches 120 from the variable stop state. The screen transition when is turned on.

  First, a case where the customer waiting demo state is shifted to the gaming state will be described with reference to screens (A1) to (A4). The screen (A1) is a screen displaying the customer waiting demonstration screen. The touch switch 120 is in an off state.

  When the touch switch 120 is turned on, the customer waiting demonstration screen ends as shown in the screen (A2). On the screen, for example, “Welcome to Parlor XX!” Or “Welcome to CRXX!” Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when a winning occurs, a variable display game is started as shown in screens (A3)-(A4).

  Next, the case of transitioning from the variable stop state to the gaming state will be described using screens (B1)-(B4). The variable stop state is one state of the customer waiting state along with the customer waiting demo state and the power saving screen display state. The screen (B1) is a screen showing the fluctuation stop state, and the decorative luminous intensity is medium (not shown).

  When the touch switch 120 is turned on, the same screen as the screen (B1) is displayed as shown in the screen (B2). Note that when the touch switch 120 is turned on, on the screen (B2), the screen brightness may be higher than that of the screen (B1), or BGM may be set to ON.

  Thereafter, when a winning occurs, a variable display game is started as shown in screens (B3)-(B4).

(Effect of 8th Embodiment)
As described above, the eighth embodiment has the same effects as the effects of the sixth and seventh embodiments. Furthermore, the effect control device 700 performs button effect processing for changing the display content on the variable display device 35 while waiting for a customer, based on the detection of the effect button SW (switch) 751 (input of a detection signal). On the other hand, the game control device 600 enters the customer waiting state based on the detection of the touch switch 120 (input of a touch switch signal) related to the transition condition to the customer waiting state or the return condition from the customer waiting state. A transition process or a return process from the customer waiting state is performed. For this reason, the button effect process and the transition process (or the return process) are performed separately in the effect control device 700 and the game control device 600, and the processing burden on both devices is reduced.

(Modification of the eighth embodiment)
In the modification of the eighth embodiment, the waiting period is counted from when the game control device 600 receives the touch switch signal until the game control device 600 transmits a command to the effect control device 700. The payout control device 640 performs the timekeeping process for the purpose of reducing this.

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of touch switch signal transmission processing according to a modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. This process is a process of transmitting a touch switch signal after a standby period corresponding to the touch switch signal in the touch switch signal transmission process of the first embodiment described in FIG. 10 (corresponding to the touch sensor monitoring process of FIG. 17). Is added.

  This process is substantially the same as the touch sensor monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 17A, and the execution subject is changed from the game control apparatus 600 to the payout control apparatus 640, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In this modification, since the transmission control of the command is performed by setting ON data / OFF data of the touch switch signal after a predetermined waiting period (C1003, C1004), the payout control device that executes this processing Corresponds to command transmission control means.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of touch sensor monitoring processing according to a modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. This process is obtained by deleting the control process for the standby period from the first touch sensor monitoring process described in FIG.

  The game control device 600 first determines whether or not a touch switch signal has been received (A1701). Here, the touch switch signal received by the game control device 600 is a signal output by the payout control device 640 after a predetermined waiting period. Therefore, game control device 600 does not receive a touch-on signal based on noise, for example.

  When the touch switch signal is received (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 600 next determines whether or not the received touch switch signal is on-data (A1702).

  When the received touch switch signal is on-data (the result of A1702 is “Y”), the game control device 600 saves the touch-on command (A1717). If the received touch switch signal is off data (result of A1702 is “N”), the touchoff command is saved (A1721). Thereafter, command transmission processing is executed (A1718), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the touch switch signal has not been received (the result of A1701 is “N”), this processing is terminated.

  As in the first embodiment, touch-on / touch-off data may be transmitted directly from the payout control device 640 to the effect control device 700.

  Thus, in the stage of transmitting a signal from the payout control device 640 to the game control device 600, the processing load of the game control device 600 is reduced by controlling the waiting period until the payout control device 640 transmits the signal. Is done. In addition, the used capacity of the ROM and RAM of the game control device 600 can be reduced.

  In addition, when a touch-on / touch-off operation is performed in a short period (4000 ms), the game control device 600 does not receive the touch-on signal and the touch-off signal. Further, the game control device 600 does not receive a touch-on signal based on noise. Therefore, the game control device 600 has a reduced frequency of receiving the touch-on / touch-off signal, and the processing load is reduced in combination with the effect control device 700.

(Time chart 20)
FIG. 133 is a time chart illustrating an example of timing at which the game control apparatus 600 that has received the touch switch signal according to the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. This example shows the command transmission timing when the player operates the operation unit 15 for a certain period.

  When the touch switch signal (high level signal) that turns on the payout control device 640 is received at time t0, the payout control device 640 goes to the game control device 600 at time t1 when a fixed period (32 ms) has elapsed from time t0. Send level touch switch signal. In addition, at time t1, the game control device 600 that has received the high-level touch switch signal transmits a touch-on command to the effect control device 700.

  After that, when a touch switch signal (low level signal) that turns off the payout control device 640 is received at time t2, the payout control device 640 notifies the game control device 600 at time t3 when a certain period (4000 ms) has elapsed from time t2. A low level touch switch signal is transmitted. In addition, at time t3, the game control device 600 that has received the low-level touch switch signal transmits a touch-off command to the effect control device 700.

  In this way, the payout control device 640 executes the control process for the standby period, and the game control device 600 only converts the received signal into a command and transmits it to the effect control device 700, so that the processing load of the game control device 600 is increased. Is also reduced.

[Time Chart 21]
FIG. 134 is a time chart illustrating an example of timing at which the game control apparatus 600 that has received the touch switch signal according to the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention outputs a touch-on / touch-off command. This example shows command transmission timing when the player repeatedly starts and stops operation of the operation unit 15.

  When the payout control device 640 detects a high-level touch switch signal and transmits a touch switch signal to the game control device 600 after 32 ms, a touch-on command is transmitted from the game control device 600 to the effect control device 700. Thereafter, at time t0, the payout control device 640 receives the low level touch switch signal, but the payout control device 640 cancels the signal transmission preparation because the high level touch switch signal is received again during the standby period (4000 ms). Is done.

  Here, until the time t1 when the waiting period of 4000 ms ends, if no signal change occurs, the payout control device 640 transmits a low-level touch switch signal to the game control device 600, and the game control device 600 transmits a touch-off command. (Command ON indicated by dotted line at time t1). However, since the operation of the operation unit 15 is started again during the standby period and the signal state is changed, the low-level touch switch signal is not transmitted to the game control device 600. For this reason, even if the signal state changes within the standby period, the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 recognize that the operation state is continuing.

  Thereafter, at time t2, the payout control device 640 receives the low level touch switch signal, and at time t3 after the standby period (4000 ms) has elapsed, the low level touch switch signal is transmitted to the game control device 600. Further, at time t3, a touch-off command is transmitted from game control device 600 to effect control device 700.

  Thus, even if the signal state changes during the standby period, the payout control device 640 cancels the received signal transmission preparation, and thus does not transmit a signal to the game control device 600.

[Time Chart 22]
FIG. 135 is a time indicating that the payout control device 640 that has received a low-level touch switch signal immediately after receiving a high-level touch switch signal according to a modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention does not output the signal. It is a chart.

  At time t0, the payout control device 640 receives the high-level touch switch signal, but since it is a signal that is less than 32 ms, preparation for signal transmission to the game control device 600 is cancelled. Therefore, even if the payout control device 640 detects an instantaneous high-level touch switch signal, the game control device 600 (main board) and the effect control device 700 do not receive the signal, so the processing load is reduced.

[Time Chart 23]
FIG. 136 is a time chart showing an example of timing at which the payout control device 640 outputs a touch switch signal when the touch effect flag of the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention is ON / OFF. As described above, the touch effect flag is set to ON when a specific variation pattern is executed.

  From time t0 to time t1, since the touch effect flag is set to OFF (the result of C1010 in FIG. 131 is “N”), a low-level touch switch signal is output after a waiting period of 4000 ms, and the game control device 600 The signal is being received.

  Thereafter, at time t2, the touch effect flag is set to ON. When the touch effect flag is set to ON, for example, the standby period of the touch-off command is shortened from 4000 ms to 32 ms so that the operation input of the operation unit 15 is quickly reflected in the effect.

  When the payout control device 640 receives a high-level touch switch signal at time t3, the game control device 600 that has received the signal from the payout control device transmits a touch-on signal at time t4 after 32 ms has elapsed. Send.

  After that, when the payout control device 640 receives the low level touch switch signal at time t5, the touch effect flag is ON, so a touch-off signal is transmitted at time t6 after 32 ms, and the signal is sent from the payout control device. The received game control device 600 transmits a touch-off command.

  Thus, when continuous operation of the operation part 15 is requested | required, a touch-off signal is also transmitted in a short period of 32 ms, and a link feeling can be maintained with respect to continuous operation input. In addition, when the operation unit 15 is continuously operated, the processing load on the related board is particularly large, but the game control device 600 sends a command based on the signal received from the payout control device 640 to the effect control device 700. Since only transmission is performed, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

[Time Chart 24]
FIG. 137 is a time chart illustrating the recognition of the operation states of the operation unit 15 and the effect button 17 in the effect control device 700 according to the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the effect by the effect button 17 operation is executed only during the period when the touch sensor is ON.

  At time t0 when the operation effective period of the effect button 17 (push button) is started, the touch switch signal is at a high level. Therefore, the operation signal of the effect button 17 that is operated shortly after the time t0 has elapsed is the effect control device 700. Has been detected by.

  Thereafter, at time t1, the effect control device 700 receives the touch-off command, so that the subsequent operation signal is turned OFF even if the effect button 17 is operated. Thereafter, at time t2, the effect control device 700 receives the touch-on command, so that the operation signal of the effect button 17 during the operation effective period is turned ON.

  In this way, by performing the effect by linking the operation of the operation unit 15 and the operation of the effect button 17, it is possible to provide an unprecedented effect. Examples of effects in which the operation unit 15 and the effect buttons 17 are linked include a fishing game and a rhythm game. Furthermore, the accumulation shooting function incorporated in the R-TYPE (registered trademark) of the shooting game may be executed by rotating the operation unit 15 or the like.

  Further, in this example, the operation of the effect button 17 is also effective during the period in which the operation unit 15 is operated, so that an operation input using the effect button can be performed while the game ball is being fired.

(Effect of Modification of Eighth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention, in the stage of transmitting a signal from the payout control device 640 to the game control device 600, the waiting period until the payout control device 640 transmits a signal. By performing this control, the processing load of the game control device 600 is reduced. In addition, the used capacity of the ROM and RAM of the game control device 600 can be reduced.

  Further, according to the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention, when a touch-on / touch-off operation is performed in a short period (4000 ms), the game control device 600 does not receive the touch-on signal and the touch-off signal. Further, the game control device 600 does not receive a touch-on signal based on noise. Therefore, in the game control device 600, the reception frequency of the touch-on / touch-off signal decreases, and the processing load is reduced.

  In addition, according to the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention, by providing an effect by linking the operation of the operation unit 15 and the operation of the effect button 17, an unprecedented effect can be provided. be able to.

(Other embodiments)
In all the embodiments shown in the present application, the gaming machine 1 is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and includes, for example, a slot machine gaming machine shown in FIG. The slot machine gaming machine also includes the operation unit 15, the MAX bet button 17, the display device 35, etc., and fulfills the present invention.

  In the sixth to eighth embodiments, when the production control device 700 receives a customer waiting demonstration end command (the result of B1803 is “Y”), a specific production (for example, “Welcome” is displayed on the variable display device 35). The display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is ended (B1804), or after the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen is ended, this specific effect may be performed as a special effect of B1819.

  In addition, using the touch switch 120, the game control device 600 causes the player to release his / her hand from the operation unit 15 in a state where neither the short-time gaming state nor the variable display game is executed (the touch switch signal When there is no input), a command may be sent to the effect control device 700 to display a warning on the variable display device 35. For example, as a warning, a prepaid card forgetting to pay attention display or a warning to stop the game in a mode in which there is a possibility of a latent probability changing game state is displayed.

  Further, the game control device 600 transmits the touch switch signal from the touch switch 120 to the information collecting terminal device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 660 so that the staying rate of the player can be investigated in the information collecting terminal device. It may be.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  From the above description, the following can be cited as typical ones of aspects of the present invention other than those described in the claims.

  (1) Game control for performing overall control of a game in the game area by performing progress control of a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed on the basis of a winning of a game ball flowing down the game area to a start area Based on command information from the game control means, an effect control means for performing display control for displaying the variable display game on a display device, a launch operation means for receiving an operation by a player, and a game ball as a game area. In the gaming machine provided with the launching device to be fired, the launch operation means is an operation detection means capable of detecting an operation state of the player to the launch operation unit, and a detection state detected by the operation detection means. An operation detection signal transmitting means for transmitting an operation detection signal correspondingly, and the game control means sends an effect command to the effect control means based on establishment of a predetermined condition. The transmission means transmits an operation detection command that can be transmitted based on reception of the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation detection signal transmission means as the effect command, and to the start area. A winning detection command that can be transmitted based on a winning can be transmitted, and the presentation control means provides a notice that suggests a game result of the variable display game based on reception of at least one of the commands A gaming machine characterized in that a production can be executed.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the effect control means executes the notice effect in a display mode corresponding to an actual gaming state based on reception of the effect command.

  (3) The launch operation means includes a launch control operation unit that can be operated while a player operates the launch operation unit, and the launch device performs the launch based on detection of an operation to the launch control operation unit. When the launch stop control signal is received from the operation means, the launch operation is stopped, and the game control means is configured to receive the launch stop control signal, and the launch stop operation is detected based on the reception of the launch stop control signal. A command is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means can change a display mode of the notice effect based on reception of the firing stop operation detection command (1) or (2) The gaming machine described in 1.

  (4) When the game control means receives an operation detection signal transmitted from the firing operation means based on a player's operation detection result by the operation detection means, the game control means operates the launching device, and the game control The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), characterized in that a restricting means for restricting the signal direction to one direction is arranged in the middle of the circuit that outputs the operation detection signal to the means.

15 Operation part (launching operation part)
30 Game board 35 Fluctuation display device (decorative display device)
51 First special figure change display (Special figure 1 indicator)
52 Second Special Figure Change Display (Special Figure 2 Display)
110 Launch stop switch 120 Touch switch (touch sensor)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 200 Launch control device 202 Launch control circuit 204 Driver 208 Driver circuit 210 Amplifier circuit 213 Voltage regulator diode 218 Branch point 220 Output line 240 Launch motor 600 Game control device 611 Game microcomputer 630 Output unit 640 Discharge control device 700 Effect control device 710 Main Microcomputer for control 720 Microcomputer for video control

Claims (2)

Game control means for overall control of the game;
Production control means for controlling production related to the game,
An operation means operable by the player
In a gaming machine equipped with
The operating means includes a first operating means and a second operating means,
The effects include a first effect, a second effect, and a third effect,
The production control means includes
The customer waiting state can be executed on condition that the game is not executed,
Executing the first effect based on an operation on the first operating means in the waiting state;
The second effect is executed based on an operation on the second operation means in the customer waiting state, and the third effect is executed based on an operation on the second operation means that is executing a game. A gaming machine. The gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a game ball, and includes a display unit having a display area capable of displaying an image.
The first operation means is an operation means according to a launching device for launching a game ball,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second effect changes an image displayed in the display area in the waiting state based on an operation of the second operation means.